Global pseudo-differential calculus on Euclidean spaces

Contents Preface Introduction ix 1 Background material 0.1 Basic Facts and Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

Author: Nicola F. | Rodino L.

30 downloads 1523 Views 2MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Contents Preface Introduction

ix 1

Background material 0.1 Basic Facts and Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 Function Spaces and Fourier Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 Identities and Inequalities for Factorials and Binomial Coeﬃcients

9 9 11 13

1

15 15 19 23 23 29 31 34 35 38 40 41 45 46 50 51 52 54

Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Symbol Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Basic Calculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Action on S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Adjoint and Transposed Operator. Action on S . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Composition of Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Global Regularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Hypoellipticity and Construction of the Parametrix . . . . . 1.3.2 Slow Variation and Construction of Elliptic Symbols . . . . 1.4 Boundedness on L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Sobolev Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Fredholm Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Abstract Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Anti-Wick Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 Short-Time Fourier Transform and Anti-Wick Operators . . 1.7.2 Relationship with the Weyl Quantization . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.3 Applications to Boundedness on L2 and Almost Positivity of Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.4 Sobolev Spaces Revisited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 Quantizations of Polynomial Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58 60 62 64

vi

Contents Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Γ-Elliptic Diﬀerential Operators; the Harmonic Oscillator . 2.3 Asymptotic Integration and Solutions of Exponential Type 2.4 H-Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Multi-Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 ΓP -Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Lp -Estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

67 . 67 . 70 . 77 . 82 . 88 . 94 . 97 . 106 . 116 . 126

G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus . . . . . . . . 3.2 Polyhomogeneous G-Operators . . . . . . . . 3.3 G-Elliptic Ordinary Diﬀerential Operators . . 3.4 Other Classes of Globally Regular Operators Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

129 129 132 137 145 148 150

. . . . . . . . . . . . Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

153 153 155 158 164 166 173 177 193 195 199

5 Non-Commutative Residue and Dixmier Trace Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Non-Commutative Residue for Γ-Operators . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Trace Functionals for G-Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Dixmier Traceability for General Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

203 203 206 213 221 224

. . . .

. . . .

227 227 229 241 256

2

3

4

6

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

Spectral Theory Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Unbounded Operators in Hilbert spaces . . . . . . . 4.2 Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators in L2 : Realization and 4.3 Complex Powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 The Resolvent Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Proof of Theorem 4.3.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Hilbert-Schmidt and Trace-Class Operators . . . . . 4.5 Heat Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Weyl Asymptotics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

Exponential Decay and Holomorphic Extension of Solutions Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 The Function Spaces Sνμ (Rd ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Γ-Operators and Semilinear Harmonic Oscillators . . . 6.3 G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators on Sνμ (Rd ) . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

Contents

vii

6.4 A Short Survey on Travelling Waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 6.5 Semilinear G-Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Bibliography

287

Index

301

Index of Notation

305

Preface The modern theory of general linear PDEs was largely addressed to local problems, i.e., to the study of solutions in a suitably small neighbourhood of x0 ∈ Rd . The analysis of global solutions, in ﬁxed domains, subsets of Rd , or even manifolds, appears as a second step, reconnecting with classical results. A simple but important global situation, where interest goes back to Quantum Mechanics, Signal Analysis and other applications in Physics and Engineering, is represented by the study of solutions in the whole Euclidean space Rd . To such study we devote the present book, making systematic use of the techniques of pseudo-diﬀerential operators. In fact, the Fourier transform and pseudo-diﬀerential operators play an essential role in the modern theory of PDEs, both from the local and global points of view. Actually, the pseudo-diﬀerential calculus was initially introduced by KohnNirenberg and Hörmander and then developed by other authors, mainly in a local context, to study local regularity and local solvability of PDEs. On the other hand, the Fourier transform and pseudo-diﬀerential calculus ﬁnd in Rd their natural setting; for example, the more recent treatment of Hörmander, the so-called Weyl-Hörmander calculus, is formulated in symplectic vector spaces. However, genuine global settings in Rd , providing regularity of solutions in the Schwartz space S(Rd ) and compactness in Rd of resolvents of globally-elliptic operators, require symbols with a precise asymptotic control when the variable x goes to inﬁnity. It is exactly these symbols that we address in the present book. Let us list some topics that we discuss in the volume, and mention several others which we neglect for the sake of brevity. First, our attention is restricted to globally elliptic equations, whereas the important study of the corresponding evolution case, in particular the hyperbolic case, is omitted. Moreover, concerning classes of pseudo-diﬀerential operators, we mainly treat symbols possessing a homogeneous structure, namely the so-called classic Γ and G symbols. Nevertheless in the ﬁrst part of the book, addressed to non-experts, we propose a relatively general calculus, very easy to handle and involving only elementary computations. With respect to the Weyl-Hörmander calculus, we make here a restrictive assumption, namely our weights are bounded from below by positive constants; such a condition is satisﬁed indeed by Γ and G classes. Also, we omit the study of the symplectic invariance of our pseudo-diﬀerential calculus, limiting ourselves

x

Preface

to an emphasis on its behaviour under Fourier conjugation, which is of relevance in some applications. Similarly, extensions to more general types of non-compact manifolds, in particular the so-called manifolds with exits, are omitted, as well as general index formulas. The arguments which are treated in the book reﬂect the research interests of the authors and their collaborators, and collect results obtained by them in the last 10 years. Our ﬁrst main line of discourse is devoted to Spectral Theory. We pay particular attention to complex powers and asymptotics for the counting function (without sharp remainder). In this regards, the present volume owes much to the preceding monograph of Boggiatto, Buzano and Rodino. We also discuss the non-commutative residue in Rd and, in strict connection with Spectral Theory, the Dixmier trace. The second main line of discourse is devoted to the study of exponential decay and holomorphic extension of the solutions. We refer here to the Gelfand-Shilov spaces Sνμ (Rd ), replacing successfully the Schwartz space in Applied Mathematics; a self-contained presentation is given in this book. The results, coming from a series of papers by Cappiello, Gramchev and Rodino, refer to semi-linear perturbations of Γ and G equations. Applications, besides to non-linear Quantum Mechanics, are also to travelling waves. We wish ﬁnally to express our gratitude to Ernesto Buzano, of the University of Torino. In addition to reading a large part of the manuscript and suggesting many improvements, he discussed with us the structure of the book and took part in the choice of the contents. We wish also to express our warmest thanks to Claudia Garetto (University of Innsbruck), Alessandro Morando (University of Brescia), Ubertino Battisti, Paolo Boggiatto, Marco Cappiello, Elena Cordero, Sandro Coriasco, Giuseppe De Donno, Gianluca Garello, Alessandro Oliaro, Patrik Wahlberg (University of Torino) for contributing scientiﬁc material, reading the manuscript and suggesting improvements.

Torino, December 2009

Fabio Nicola, Luigi Rodino

Introduction To give an introduction to the contents of the book, let us consider initially the basic models to which our pseudo-diﬀerential calculus will apply, namely the linear partial diﬀerential operators with polynomial coeﬃcients in Rd : (I.1) P = cαβ xβ Dα , x ∈ Rd , cαβ ∈ C, where in the sum (α, β) ∈ Nd × Nd runs over a ﬁnite subset of indices. A natural setting for P is given by the Schwartz space S(Rd ) and its dual S (Rd ). These spaces are invariant under the action of the Fourier transform d Fu(ξ) = u (ξ) = e−ixξ u(x) dx, ¯ with dx ¯ = (2π)− 2 dx. (I.2) Note also that the conjugation FP F −1 gives still an operator of the form (I.1). The preliminary problem in our analysis will be to establish the global regularity of P by means of the construction of parametrices in the pseudo-diﬀerential form, with suitable symbols a(x, ξ) ∈ C ∞ (Rd × Rd ): Au(x) = a(x, D)u(x) = eixξ a(x, ξ) u(ξ) dξ. ¯ (I.3) Namely, a parametrix A of P is a linear map S(Rd ) → S(Rd ), S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) such that (I.4) P A = I + R1 , AP = I + R2 where R1 , R2 are regularizing, i.e., R1 , R2 : S (Rd ) → S(Rd ). Starting from the equation P u = f with u ∈ S (Rd ), f ∈ S(Rd ), the second identity in (I.4) implies AP u = u + R2 u, hence we conclude u ∈ S(Rd ), i.e., in our terminology P is globally regular. In particular all the solutions u ∈ S (Rd ) of P u = 0 belong to S(Rd ). From the existence of a pseudo-diﬀerential parametrix A, we may also deduce the Fredholm property of P in Sobolev spaces with suitable weights. Deﬁne the symbol of P as standard: (I.5) p(x, ξ) = cαβ xβ ξ α .

2

Introduction

Which properties of the polynomial p(x, ξ) warrant the construction of the parametrix? The standard (local) ellipticity can be read for p(x, ξ) in (I.5), where we assume |α| ≤ m, |β| ≤ n, as well as the condition

cαβ xβ ξ α = 0

for ξ = 0.

(I.6)

|α|=m |β|≤n

This provides the existence of local pseudo-diﬀerential parametrices and local regularity, but does not give the required control on the asymptotic behaviour of the solutions for x → ∞. The basic idea is then to add to (I.6) conditions involving the x-variables in the homogeneous structure. As suggested by the invariance of the class of the operators (I.1) under Fourier conjugation, we expect in these conditions a joint or symmetrical role for the x and ξ variables. We may identify two diﬀerent approaches, somewhat in competition with each other from the historical point of view, both based on model equations of Quantum Mechanics. Γ-classes. Our starting model is the harmonic oscillator −Δ + |x|2 − λ.

(I.7)

We generalize it by considering

P =

cαβ xβ Dα

(I.8)

|α|+|β|≤m

satisfying the Γ-ellipticity assumption cαβ xβ ξ α = 0 pm (x, ξ) =

for (x, ξ) = (0, 0),

(I.9)

|α|+|β|=m

which implies local ellipticity. The operator in (I.7) is Γ-elliptic, independently of λ ∈ C. A parametrix for P in (I.8) is constructed as a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol having principal part 1/p(x, ξ), which we cut oﬀ in the bounded region where possibly p(x, ξ) = 0. The natural class containing the symbol of the parametrix is deﬁned by considering z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d and imposing the estimates |∂zγ a(z)| zm−|γ| ,

z ∈ R2d ,

(I.10)

where now m ∈ R, γ ∈ N2d and z = (1 + |z|2 )1/2 = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 . The corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential calculus was ﬁrst given in Shubin [182], 1971. G-classes. The basic model is the free particle operator in Rd −Δ − λ.

(I.11)

Introduction

3

As a generalization, consider the operator P = cαβ xβ Dα

(I.12)

|α|≤m |β|≤n

satisfying the following G-ellipticity condition. First, considering the so-called bi-homogeneous principal symbol, we impose cαβ xβ ξ α = 0 for x = 0, ξ = 0. (I.13) pm,n (x, ξ) = |α|=m |β|=n

Then we assume the standard local ellipticity (I.6) and the dual property, obtained from (I.6) by interchanging the role of x and ξ:

cαβ xβ ξ α = 0

for x = 0.

(I.14)

|α|≤m |β|=n

In the case n = 0, i.e., when P = p(D) is an operator with constant coeﬃcients, the local ellipticity (I.6) implies (I.13), whereas (I.14) is satisﬁed if and only if p(ξ) = 0 for all ξ ∈ Rd . So the operator in (I.11) is G-elliptic when λ ∈ R+ ∪ {0}. Under the assumptions (I.6), (I.13), (I.14), a parametrix can be constructed with symbol in the G-classes deﬁned by the estimates |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| ξm−|α| xn−|β| ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

(I.15)

for m ∈ R, n ∈ R. The corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential operators were introduced by Parenti [156], 1972, and then studied in detail by Cordes [59], 1995. In short: the ﬁrst aim of this book is to present a simple pseudo-diﬀerential calculus, containing both Γ-classes and G-classes as particular cases, and to give in this framework some main results, concerning construction of parametrices, weighted Sobolev spaces, Fredholm property and global regularity. Peculiarities of Γ and G operators, depending on the respective homogeneous structures, are then emphasized. Attention is given to recent results, concerning in particular Lp -boundedness, non-commutative residues, exponential decay and holomorphic extension of solutions of semi-linear Γ and G equations. A more detailed description of the contents can be found in the Summary preceding each chapter. In the following we illustrate general ideas, list models having importance in the applications and provide some references. A detailed bibliography will be found in the Notes at the end of each chapter. As for the pseudo-diﬀerential calculus in Chapter 1, the symbols are deﬁned by the estimates |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| M (x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

(I.16)

4

Introduction

where M , Φ, Ψ are positive weight functions in R2d satisfying suitable conditions. In particular, the eﬀectiveness of the symbolic calculus is granted by the strong uncertainty principle (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )/2 Φ(x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ),

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

(I.17)

for some > 0. The Γ-classes in (I.10) are recaptured by setting Φ(x, ξ) = Ψ(x, ξ) = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 , so that (I.17) is valid with = 2. The choice Φ(x, ξ) = x, Ψ(x, ξ) = ξ gives the G-classes. The strong uncertainty principle is satisﬁed with = 1 since (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 ≤ xξ = Φ(x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ). In Chapter 2 we ﬁx attention on Γ-classes and their generalizations, considering the case when p(x, ξ) in (I.5) is a H-polynomial in R2d , or in particular a multi-quasi-elliptic polynomial as in Boggiatto, Buzano, Rodino [19]: p(x, ξ) = cαβ xβ ξ α , (I.18) (β,α)∈P

where the Newton polyhedron P of p(x, ξ) is assumed to be complete (in short: the normals to the faces have strictly positive components), with lower bound |p(x, ξ)| ΛP (x, ξ) =

x2β ξ 2α

1/2 (I.19)

(β,α)∈P

for large (x, ξ). Taking Ψ(x, ξ) = Φ(x, ξ) = ΛP (x, ξ)1/μ , where μ is the so-called formal order of P, we obtain a symbolic calculus which satisﬁes the strong uncertainty principle. Following the results of Morando [148], Garello and Morando [85], we prove that the corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential operators are Lp -bounded, with 1 < p < ∞. For the operator P with symbol (I.18) we deduce in particular the a priori estimates

xβ Dα u Lp P u Lp + u Lp (I.20) (β,α)∈P

and related Fredholm properties. The results apply for example to the following generalizations of the harmonic oscillator P = −Δ + V (x)

(I.21)

where the potential V (x) is a positive multi-quasi-elliptic polynomial with respect to the x-variables. In Chapter 3, besides G-pseudo-diﬀerential operators, we consider extensions of (I.21) to more general potentials V (x), by constructing the parametrix in the classes with weights Φ(x, ξ) = 1, Ψ(x, ξ) = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )ρ/2 , ρ > 0, for which (I.17) is still satisﬁed, cf. Buzano [27]. Chapter 4 is devoted to Spectral Theory for pseudo-diﬀerential operators with symbol in the classes deﬁned by (I.16), (I.17). For generic weights Φ, Ψ, we

Introduction

5

study the complex powers following Buzano and Nicola [30], and compute the trace of the heat kernel. Precise asymptotic expansions are deduced for the counting functions N (λ), λ → +∞, of self-adjoint operators in the case of Γ and G classes. Namely, for a Γ-operator with principal symbol pm (x, ξ) as in (I.9) we prove the formula of Shubin [182] 2d −d m dx dξ. (I.22) N (λ) ∼ λ (2π) pm (x,ξ)≤1

This gives in particular for the eigenvalues of the harmonic oscillator (I.7) the well-known formula λd N (λ) ∼ d . (I.23) 2 d! For a G-operator with bi-homogeneous principal symbol pm,n (x, ξ), m > 0, n > 0, as in (I.13), we obtain according to Maniccia and Panarese [138]: ⎧ d ⎪ ⎨Cλ m log λ, for m = n, d N (λ) ∼ C λ m , (I.24) for m < n, ⎪ ⎩ nd for m > n, C λ , for constants C, C , C which can be computed in terms of pm,n , of the symbol in (I.6) and the symbol in (I.14), respectively. In Chapter 5 we present results on non-commutative residue and Dixmier’s trace, from Boggiatto and Nicola [20], Nicola [152], Nicola and Rodino [154]. Let us recall that a linear map on an algebra over C is called a trace if it vanishes on commutators. For the algebra of the classical pseudo-diﬀerential operators on a compact manifold, a trace is given by the so-called Wodzicki’s non-commutative residue. For classical Γ-operators in Rd , namely with symbol having asymptotic expansion in homogeneous terms a(z) ∼ ∞ j=0 am−j (z), m ∈ Z, we deﬁne a−2d (Θ) dΘ, (I.25) Res a(x, D) = S2d−1

2d

where z = (x, ξ) ∈ R , and dΘ is the usual surface measure on S2d−1 . The map Res in (I.25) turns out to be the unique trace on the algebra of the classical Γoperators which vanishes on regularizing operators, up to a multiplicative constant. Similarly to the result of Connes in the case of a compact manifold, even in Rd the map Res coincides with the Dixmier trace Trω , when applied to a Γ-operator of order −2d. Namely Res a(x, D) = 2d(2π)d Trω (a(x, D))

(I.26)

where, limiting for simplicity to a positive self-adjoint operator a(x, D) with eigenvalues λj → 0+ , j = 1, 2, . . ., N 1 λj . N →∞ log N j=1

Trω (a(x, D)) = lim

(I.27)

6

Introduction

We may test (I.26), (I.27) on the inverse of the d-th power of the harmonic oscillator in (I.7): h(x, D) = (−Δ + |x|2 )−d (I.28) for which we have Res h(x, D) = S2d−1

dΘ = 2d(2π)d Trω (h(x, D)),

(I.29)

as we easily deduce from (I.23). We obtain similar results for the algebra of Goperators. Concerning operators deﬁned by general weights Φ and Ψ, we content ourselves with giving a suﬃcient condition for Dixmier traceability. Because of the lack of homogeneity, the problem of the deﬁnition of the non-commutative residue is in this case diﬃcult, and challenging. In the conclusive Chapter 6 we replace, as a basic space, the Schwartz space S(Rd ) with the subspaces Sνμ (Rd ), μ > 0, ν > 0, which are better adapted to the study of the problems of Applied Mathematics. We have f ∈ Sνμ (Rd ) if and only if |f (x)| e−|x| |f(ξ)| e

1/ν

1/μ

−|ξ|

,

x ∈ Rd ,

(I.30)

,

ξ∈R ,

(I.31)

d

for some > 0. If μ ≤ 1, the function f extends to the complex domain, and the estimates (I.31) imply precise bounds for this extension. After a detailed discussion of the properties of the classes Sνμ (Rd ) we present the results of Cappiello, Gramchev and Rodino [41], [44], Cappiello and Rodino [45], concerning exponential decay and holomorphic extension of the solutions of Γ-elliptic and G-elliptic equations. In short, the conclusions are the following. As suggested by the behaviour of the eigenfunctions of the harmonic oscillator, i.e., the Hermite functions, all the 1/2 solutions u ∈ S (Rd ) of a generic Γ-elliptic equation P u = 0 belong to S1/2 (Rd ), that implies super-exponential decay and holomorphic extension in Cd . Instead, eigenfunctions of G-elliptic equations are in S11 (Rd ); this gives exponential decay and holomorphic extension limited to a strip {x + iy ∈ Cd : |y| < T }. Particular attention in the second part of Chapter 6 is reserved for semi-linear equations, because of their importance in applications. Consider for example the semi-linear harmonic oscillator of the Quantum Mechanics: −Δ + |x|2 u − λu = G[u],

(I.32)

where the non-linear term is G[u] = uk , k ≥ 2, or more generally G[u] = L(uk ) with L a ﬁrst-order Γ-operator. For the eigenfunctions of (I.32), i.e., homoclinics, we still have super-exponential decay; however, with respect to the linear Γ-case, the entire extension is lost, and analyticity in the complex domain is limited to a strip.

Introduction

7

A basic example in the G-case is given by a linear part with constant coeﬃcients cα Dα u = F [u]. (I.33) |α|≤m

As observed before, we have G-ellipticity if and only if the symbol p(ξ) = |α|≤m cα ξ α is elliptic in the standard sense and p(ξ) = 0 for all ξ ∈ Rd . The non-linear term F [u] is an arbitrary polynomial in u and lower order derivatives. The result for (I.33) is the same as in the linear case, namely homoclinics belong to S11 (Rd ). Relevant examples are (I.34) u − Cu + u2 = 0 in R for the solitary wave v(t, x) = u(x−Ct), C > 0, of the Korteweg-de Vries equation, and higher order travelling waves equations; we recapture for all of them the results of exponential decay, expected by the physical intuition. Our result also applies to the d-dimensional extension of (I.34) −Δu + u = uk ,

k ≥ 2,

(I.35)

appearing in plasma physics and non-linear optics. Finally, as a non-local example, the intermediate-long-wave equation in R eD + e−D Du + γu = u2 , eD − e−D

γ > −1,

(I.36)

is contained in our theory, because the symbol ξCtgh ξ +γ of the Fourier multiplier in the left-hand side of (I.36) is G-elliptic, and its homoclinics belong to S11 (R).

Background Material In this chapter we ﬁx the notation used in the present book and we collect some results from Real Analysis which will be useful in the sequel. For a comprehensive account we refer the reader to Hörmander [119, Vol I]; see also Grubb [102].

0.1 Basic Facts and Notation We employ standard set-theoretic notation, with one peculiarity: set-theoretic inclusion A ⊂ B does not exclude equality. Thus proper inclusion has to be stated explicitly: A ⊂ B and A = B. We set N = {0, 1, 2, ...}, whereas Z, R stand for the set of all integer and real numbers, respectively. We deﬁne R+ = {x ∈ R : x > 0}, R− = {x ∈ R : x < 0}. Given a real number x, we set x+ = max{x, 0} = 12 (x + |x|) and x− = min{x, 0} = 12 (x − |x|). Hence x+ and x− are the positive and the negative part of x respectively. The integer part of a real number x is denoted by [x]. Then [x] is the unique integer such that [x] ≤ x < [x] + 1. If X is a non-empty set and f, g : X → [0, +∞), we set f (x) g(x),

x ∈ X,

if there exists C > 0 such that f (x) ≤ Cg(x), for all x ∈ X. Moreover, if f and g depend on a further variable z ∈ Z, the statement that, for all z ∈ Z, f (x, z) g(x, z),

x ∈ X,

means that for every z ∈ Z there exists a real number Cz > 0 such that f (x, z) ≤ Cz g(x, z) for every x ∈ X. Of course, it may happen that supz∈Z Cz = ∞. Also, we set f (x) g(x), x ∈ X, if f (x) g(x) and g(x) f (x), x ∈ X, and similarly as above if the functions depend on a further parameter.

10

Background Material We will employ the multi-index notation. Given α, β ∈ Nd and x ∈ Rd , we

set α! = α1 ! · · · αd !, |α| = α1 + · · · + αd , α ≤ β ⇐⇒ αj ≤ βj , for j = 1, . . . , d, α < β ⇐⇒ α = β and α ≤ β,

d αj α! α = , β ≤ α, = β β!(α − β)! β j j=1 αd 1 xα = xα 1 · · · xd .

Functions are always understood complex-valued, if not stated otherwise. Partial derivatives are denoted by ∂j = ∂xj =

∂ , ∂xj

Dj = Dxj = −i∂j ,

j = 1, . . . , d,

where i is the imaginary unit. More generally, we set ∂ α = ∂1α1 · · · ∂dαd = ∂xα = ∂xα11 · · · ∂xαdd , Dα = D1α1 · · · Ddαd = Dxα = Dxα11 · · · Dxαdd . If x, ξ ∈ Rd , we set xξ = x · ξ = x, ξ =

d

xj ξ j ,

j=1

|x| =

d j=1

x2j

1/2 ,

1/2 2 . x = 1 + |x| Observe that x is a smooth function satisfying ∂xj x = xj /x. In general one veriﬁes that (0.1.1) |∂xα x| ≤ 2|α|+1 |α|!x1−|α| , for all x ∈ Rd and all α ∈ Nd . The following elementary inequality, sometimes called Peetre’s inequality, will be used throughout the book: x + ys ≤ cs xs y|s| ,

x, y ∈ Rd , s ∈ R,

with a constant cs > 0. The power of multi-index notation is well explained by the following las. For an open subset X of Rd , consider the spaces C n (X) of functions continuous partial derivatives of order ≤ n, and C ∞ (X) = ∩n∈N C n (X). f, g ∈ C n (X), we have Leibniz’ formula: α ∂ β f ∂ α−β g, |α| ≤ n. ∂ α (f g) = β β≤α

(0.1.2) formuhaving Given

(0.1.3)

0.2. Function Spaces and Fourier Transform

11

If we assume furthermore that X is convex, we have Taylor’s formula: f (y) =

1 ∂ α f (x)(y − x)α α! |α|
for x, y ∈ X.

|α|=n

A linear diﬀerential operator in an open set X ⊂ Rd is deﬁned as aα (x)D α , A=

(0.1.4)

|α|≤m

with aα : X → C for |α| ≤ m. The symbol of the operator A is the polynomial in the ξ ∈ Rd variables aα (x)ξ α ; (0.1.5) a(x, ξ) = |α|≤m

thus the operator A can be thought of as obtained by substituting ξ = D in (0.1.5). Then it is customary to re-write (0.1.4) as a(x, D) = aα (x)D α . |α|≤m

We want to remark that the symbol of a(x, D) can also be computed by the formula a(x, ξ) = e−ix·ξ a(x, Dx )eix·ξ . For example the symbol of the Laplace operator Δ = Δx =

(0.1.6) d j=1

∂x2j is given by

2

e−ix·ξ Δx eix·ξ = − |ξ| .

0.2 Function Spaces and Fourier Transform As standard, Lp (Rd ), 1 ≤ p ≤ ∞, stands for the Banach space of measurable functions f : Rd → C satisfying

1/p p

f Lp (Rd ) = |f (x)| dx < ∞, if p < ∞, or f L∞ (Rd ) = ess − sup |f (x)| < ∞ if p = ∞ (where two functions deﬁne the same element if they coincide away from a set of Lebesgue measure 0). The inner product in L2 (Rd ) is deﬁned by (f, g) = f (x)g(x) dx,

12

Background Material

and is hence linear in the ﬁrst component. The Schwartz space S(Rd ) of rapidly decaying functions is deﬁned as the space of all smooth functions f in Rd such that sup |xβ ∂ α f (x)| < ∞,

x∈Rd

for all α, β ∈ Nd .

It is a Fréchet space with the obvious seminorms. Its topological dual S (Rd ) is the space of the temperate distributions. We write ·, · for the duality between Schwartz functions and temperate distributions. In particular, (u, v) = u, v for u, v ∈ S(Rd ). The Fourier transform ¯ Ff (ξ) = f (ξ) = e−ixξ f (x) dx, with

dx ¯ = (2π)−d/2 dx,

deﬁnes an isomorphism of S(Rd ) which extends to an isomorphism of S (Rd ), and an isometry of L2 (Rd ). The inverse Fourier transform is F−1 f (x) = eixξ f (ξ) dξ. ¯ (0.2.1) The following identities are valid for functions in S(Rd ) and distributions in S (Rd ): α f )(ξ) = ξ α f(ξ), (D α f ) = (−1) (x

|α|

(0.2.2)

D f. α

(0.2.3)

We have also f ∗ g = (2π)d/2 f g,

(0.2.4)

fg = (2π)d/2 f ∗ g,

(0.2.5)

for f and g in appropriate subspaces of S (Rd ), e.g. f ∈ S(Rd ), g ∈ S (Rd ) or vice-versa. The Sobolev spaces H s (Rd ), s ∈ R, are deﬁned by means of the Fourier transform as H s (Rd ) := {f ∈ S (Rd ) : ξs f(ξ) ∈ L2 (Rd )}, with f H s (Rd ) = ·s f L2 (Rd ) . When s = k ∈ N an equivalent norm is given by

f H k (Rd )

|α|≤k

∂ α f L2 (Rd ) ,

f ∈ H k (Rd ).

0.3. Identities and Inequalities for Factorials and Binomial Coeﬃcients

13

Moreover, we recall the Sobolev embedding H s (Rd ) → L∞ (Rd ),

for s > d/2.

(0.2.6)

Finally, we will also use the fact that the space H s (Rd ), for s > d/2, is an algebra with respect to pointwise multiplication, and the following Schauder estimates are satisﬁed: (0.2.7)

f g H s (Rd ) ≤ Cs f H s (Rd ) g H s (Rd ) , f, g ∈ H s (Rd ).

0.3 Identities and Inequalities for Factorials and Binomial Coeﬃcients We collect in the sequel some identities and inequalities for factorials and binomial coeﬃcients. First we recall the generalized Newton formula:

(t1 + . . . + td )N =

|α|=N

N! d tα1 . . . tα d , α 1 ! . . . αd ! 1

(0.3.1)

where N ∈ N and t1 , ..., td are real numbers. Fixing t1 = . . . = td = 1 in (0.3.1) we deduce N! . (0.3.2) dN = α! |α|=N

This implies in particular

|α|! ≤ d|α| α!.

(0.3.3)

When d = 2, we obtain from (0.3.2) and (0.3.3), respectively 2N =

k+j=N

N! k! j!

(0.3.4)

and for any k, j ∈ N. Hence

(k + j)! ≤ 2k+j k! j!

(0.3.5)

(α + β)! ≤ 2|α|+|β| α! β!

(0.3.6)

for any α, β ∈ Nd , whereas obviously α! β! ≤ (α + β)!.

(0.3.7)

From (0.3.4) we have then α β≤α

β

= 2|α| ,

α ∈ Nd ,

(0.3.8)

14

Background Material

and in particular

α ≤ 2|α| , β ≤ α. β Recall now the deﬁnition of the Euler Gamma function +∞ e−s st−1 ds, t > 0. Γ(t) =

(0.3.9)

0

Observing that Γ(t + 1) = tΓ(t) and Γ(1) = 1, one obtains n! = Γ(n + 1),

n ∈ N.

(0.3.10)

The asymptotic behaviour of the Gamma function is given by the well-known Stirling formula: √ Γ(t + 1) = tt e−t 2πt eθ(t)/(12t) , t ≥ 1, where 0 < θ(t) < 1. In particular we have tt ≤ et Γ(t + 1), and also Γ(t + 1) ≤ tt for large t. Taking into account (0.3.10), we then obtain for N = 1, 2, . . . , √ (0.3.11) N ! = N N e−N 2πN eθN /(12N ) , where 0 < θN < 1; in particular we have N N ≤ eN N !,

(0.3.12)

whereas obviously N ! ≤ N for all N = 1, 2, . . . . We have from the Taylor expansion of et for t > 0, N

tN ≤ N !et , N

which implies t

N = 0, 1, . . . ,

(0.3.13)

≤ N e . This last inequality is improved by N t

tA ≤ AA et−A ,

A > 0, t > 0,

(0.3.14)

as one gets by taking logarithms. In particular we have tA e−t ≤ AA . Finally it will be useful to observe that

#{α = (α1 , . . . , αd ) ∈ Nd : |α| ≤ m} = whereas

m+d , m

m+d−1 . d−1

(0.3.15)

#{α = (α1 , . . . , αd ) ∈ Nd : |α| = m} =

(0.3.16)

Chapter 1

Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus Summary Pseudo-diﬀerential operators, in a broad sense, are linear operators of the type u(ξ) dξ, ¯ u ∈ S(Rd ). (1.0.1) a(x, D)u(x) = eixξ a(x, ξ) The function a(x, ξ), satisfying suitable estimates in R2d , is called the symbol of a(x, D). In fact, (1.0.1) makes sense as a temperate distribution even for a ∈ S (R2d ). A linear partial diﬀerential operator a(x, D) = cα (x)Dα , (1.0.2) |α|≤m

with slowly increasing coeﬃcients can be regarded as a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol cα (x)ξ α , a(x, ξ) = |α|≤m

as one sees by using (0.2.1), (0.2.2). The way of associating to a symbol a the operator a(x, D) in (1.0.1) is called standard, or left, quantization. The terminology is justiﬁed by the special case of the partial diﬀerential operators, where this quantization amounts to replacing ξ by D and to putting the coeﬃcients to the left of the derivatives. Other important examples of pseudo-diﬀerential operators are given by convolution operators u → T ∗ u; in fact, assuming the Fourier transform of the distribution T is well deﬁned, we have u(ξ) dξ, ¯ u ∈ S(Rd ), (1.0.3) (T ∗ u)(x) = eixξ a(ξ)

16

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

where a(ξ) = (2π)d/2 T(ξ), see (0.2.4). As a particular case we quote the linear partial diﬀerential operators with constant coeﬃcients and the convolution with fundamental solutions whose Fourier transform is deﬁned in some sense. The ﬁrst task of the theory is to express functional operations between pseudo-diﬀerential operators, as transposition and compositions, in terms of analytic operations on the corresponding symbols. For this program to work, the symbols need to satisfy some growth estimates at inﬁnity, together with their derivatives. In Sections 1.1, 1.2, we will consider symbols a(x, ξ) satisfying, for every α, β ∈ Nd , estimates of the type |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| M (x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

for (x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

(1.0.4)

where Φ, Ψ, M are positive weight functions in R2d satisfying some technical conditions. We denote by S(M ; Φ, Ψ) the space of functions a(x, ξ) satisfying estimates (1.0.4). The choice of the functions Φ, Ψ, M depends on the problem under consideration; we will clarify this point later. Now, the symbol of the composition of two operators of the form (1.0.3) is exactly the product of the corresponding symbols. This is generally not true when dealing with two operators of the form (1.0.1), say a(x, D) and b(x, D); nevertheless, if a ∈ S(M1 ; Φ, Ψ) and b ∈ S(M2 ; Φ, Ψ), the composition of a(x, D) and b(x, D) is still a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in S(M1 M2 ; Φ, Ψ) which can be written as a(x, ξ)b(x, ξ) + r(x, ξ), (1.0.5) with a remainder r ∈ S(M1 M2 h; Φ, Ψ), where h := Φ−1 Ψ−1 is the so-called Planck function. It is assumed h(x, ξ) 1, so that r(x, ξ) also belongs to S(M1 M2 ; Φ, Ψ). Precisely, we have for r(x, ξ) the asymptotic expansion r(x, ξ) ∼

1 ∂ α a(x, ξ)Dxα b(x, ξ), α! ξ

(1.0.6)

α=0

which means that, for every N ≥ 2, 1 α r(x, ξ) − ∂ a(x, ξ)Dxα b(x, ξ) ∈ S(M1 M2 hN ; Φ, Ψ). α! ξ

(1.0.7)

0<|α|≤N −1

In fact, in several applications we will assume the so-called strong uncertainty principle h(x, ξ) (1 + |x| + |ξ|)−δ for some δ > 0, which guarantees, for example, that the expression in (1.0.7) has a strong decay at inﬁnity provided N is large enough. Similarly, we will prove formulas for the symbol of the transpose and the adjoint of a pseudo-diﬀerential operator. Here we only remark that the transpose of the diﬀerential operator a(x, D) = |α|≤m cα (x)D α is given by t a(x, D)u(x) = (−D)α (cα (x)u(x)) , |α|≤m

Summary

17

which suggests the study of pseudo-diﬀerential operators of the form Op1 (b)u(x) = ei(x−y)ξ b(y, ξ)u(y) dy ¯ dξ. ¯

(1.0.8)

α In fact, we have t a(x, D) = Op1 (b), with b(x, ξ) = |α|≤m cα (x)(−ξ) . The correspondence b → Op1 (b) is called right quantization. More generally, we will develop the whole theory for the so-called τ -quantization: Opτ (a)u(x) = ei(x−y)ξ a((1 − τ )x + τ y, ξ)u(y) dy ¯ dξ, ¯ (1.0.9) where τ ∈ R. When τ = 0 we recapture the operator a(x, D) in (1.0.1), whereas for τ = 1 we obtain the quantization in (1.0.8). The case τ = 1/2 is also of special interest and yields the Weyl quantization

x+y aw u(x) = ei(x−y)ξ a , ξ u(y) dy ¯ dξ. ¯ (1.0.10) 2 For example, in dimension d = 1, if a(x, ξ) = xξ, aw =

1 (xDx + Dx x). 2

This quantization has the nice property that real-valued symbols give rise to (formally) self-adjoint operators, which is one reason for its usefulness in Quantum Mechanics. We will prove in Section 1.2 that every operator of the form (1.0.10), with symbol a in some class S(M ; Φ, Ψ), is continuous on S(Rd ) and extends to a continuous operator on S (Rd ). Moreover symbols in S(1; Φ, Ψ) yield bounded operators in L2 (Rd ), cf. Section 1.4. This is easy to see by the aid of the symbolic calculus, assuming the strong uncertainty principle. A more general result will be discussed later as an application of Anti-Wick techniques. Let us now come to the main applications of the symbolic calculus in Section 1.3. The role of (1.0.5) and (1.0.6) is fundamental in this connection. Suppose, for example, that a symbol a(x, ξ) satisﬁes the estimate |a(x, ξ)| M (x, ξ), for |x| + |ξ| large; we say that a is elliptic. Then (1.0.5) and (1.0.6) show that the operator B with symbol a(x, ξ)−1 fulﬁlls Ba(x, D) = I + S1 ,

a(x, D)B = I + S2 ,

(1.0.11)

where S1 and S2 have symbols in S(h; Φ, Ψ). Under the strong uncertainty principle, and by a slightly more reﬁned argument based on (1.0.7), one can in fact construct B as a pseudo-diﬀerential operator verifying (1.0.11) with S1 and S2 regularizing operators, i.e., continuous as maps S (Rd ) → S(Rd ). We will refer to B as the parametrix of a(x, D). The existence of a parametrix gives at once a global regularity result for any operator with elliptic symbol; namely, if u ∈ S (Rd )

18

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

and a(x, D)u ∈ S(Rd ), then u ∈ S(Rd ). This also explains the advantage of considering the above quite general symbol classes: dealing with a given symbol a(x, ξ) (typically, of a particular diﬀerential operator), one looks for weights Φ, Ψ such that a satisﬁes (1.0.4) with M (x, ξ) = |a(x, ξ)| and, if there exist any, a(x, D) is then globally regular. Many examples and applications of this general principle will be detailed in the subsequent chapters. Another application of the parametrix is the theory of Sobolev spaces tailored to the above symbol classes. In Section 1.5 we will deﬁne the Sobolev space H(M ) as A−1 (L2 (Rd )), endowed with a convenient norm, where A is any pseudodiﬀerential operator with an elliptic symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Any pseudo-diﬀerential operator P with symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ) will deﬁne a bounded operator from H(M ) to H(M/M ). These spaces measure the regularity and decay of functions and temperate distributions in Rd and allow us to give precise global regularity results for pseudodiﬀerential operators with elliptic symbols. For example, if P has an elliptic symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and u ∈ S (Rd ) with P u ∈ H(M/M ), then u ∈ H(M ). It is worth noticing that when regarded as operators on such tailored Sobolev spaces, elliptic operators become Fredholm (they have kernel and cokernel of ﬁnite dimension) and an index theory can be developed, cf. Section 1.6. In Section 1.7 we will consider yet another type of quantization, the so-called Anti-Wick quantization. To this end, let 1

2

Gy,η (x) = π −d/4 eixη e− 2 |x−y| , where y, η ∈ Rd are regarded as parameters. These functions satisfy Gy,η L2 (Rd ) = 1 for every (y, η) ∈ R2d , and have the property to be localized near y and to have the Fourier transform localized near η, i.e., by denoting the open ball in Rd of center x0 and radius R by B(x0 , R), Gy,η L2 (B(y,1)) ≥ c, and G y,η L2 (B(η,1)) ≥ c, for some c > 0, uniformly with respect to y, η. By this reason, the behaviour near y of a given function u(x), and the behaviour near η of its Fourier transform u (ξ), are captured together by the short-time Fourier transform V u of u, deﬁned by V u(y, η) = (u, Gy,η ). It is easy to see that V acts on S(Rd ) → S(R2d ) continuously and extends to a continuous map S (Rd ) → S (R2d ). Moreover V : L2 (Rd ) → L2 (R2d ) is an isometry, up to a constant factor. Then, the Anti-Wick operator Aa with symbol a ∈ S (R2d ) reads Aa u = (2π)−d V ∗ (aV u), u ∈ S(Rd ), namely as a Fourier multiplier but with the Fourier transform replaced by the short-time Fourier transform. It turns out that Aa : S(Rd ) → S (Rd ) continuously, and that Aa is in fact a pseudo-diﬀerential operator whose Weyl symbol b(x, ξ) is obtained by convolving a(x, ξ) with a Gaussian function in R2d . The main feature of the Anti-Wick

1.1. Symbol Classes

19

quantization is that it preserves positivity, i.e., non-negative symbols yield nonnegative operators. This is not true for the Weyl quantization, but the result for Anti-Wick operators can be fruitfully used to prove lower bounds for Weyl operators. Anti-Wick techniques also yield a very elementary proof of the L2 -boundedness of pseudo-diﬀerential operators whose symbols a(x, ξ) are bounded together with their derivatives, i.e., satisfying for every α, β ∈ Nd , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| ≤ Cαβ ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

The functions Gy,η can in fact be used to almost diagonalize such operators, in the sense that, after conjugating with the short-time Fourier transform, the operator V a(x, D)V ∗ has an integral kernel K(y , η ; y, η) dominated by a convolution kernel in L1 . Young’s inequality then gives the desired boundedness on L2 .

1.1 Symbol Classes A positive continuous function Φ(x, ξ), (x, ξ) ∈ R2d , is called a sub-linear weight if (1.1.1) 1 ≤ Φ(x, ξ) 1 + |x| + |ξ|, for x, ξ ∈ Rd . It is called a temperate weight if, for some s > 0, Φ(x + y, ξ + η) Φ(x, ξ)(1 + |y| + |η|)s ,

for x, ξ, y, η ∈ Rd .

(1.1.2)

Observe that (1.1.2) with x−y and ξ−η in place of x and ξ gives, for any temperate weight Φ, the lower bound Φ(x + y, ξ + η) Φ(x, ξ)(1 + |y| + |η|)−s ,

for x, ξ, y, η ∈ Rd ,

(1.1.3)

i.e., Φ−1 is temperate as well. Moreover, the product and real powers of temperate weights are still temperate weights. Also, (1.1.2) and (1.1.3) with x = ξ = 0 yield (1 + |y| + |η|)−s Φ(y, η) (1 + |y| + |η|)s . Basic examples of temperate weights are the functions (1 + |x| + |ξ|)m , and (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )m/2 , m ∈ R (by Peetre’s inequality (0.1.2) in R2d ). Similarly, xm and ξm , m ∈ R, regarded as functions in R2d are temperate weights. Deﬁnition 1.1.1. (Symbol classes) Let Φ(x, ξ), Ψ(x, ξ) be sub-linear and temperate weights. Let M (x, ξ) be a temperate weight. We denote by S(M ; Φ, Ψ), or for short S(M ), the space of all smooth functions a(x, ξ), (x, ξ) ∈ R2d , such that for every α, β ∈ Nd , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| M (x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

for (x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

(1.1.4)

20

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

The following remarks follow at once from Deﬁnition 1.1.1. If a ∈ S(M ), then ∂ξα ∂xβ a ∈ S(M Ψ−|α| Φ−|β| ). By Leibniz’ rule, if a ∈ S(M1 ) and b ∈ S(M2 ), then ab ∈ S(M1 M2 ). Moreover, if M1 M2 , then S(M1 ) ⊂ S(M2 ). The following family of seminorms

a k,S(M ;Φ,Ψ) =

sup

sup

|α|+|β|≤k

(x,ξ)∈R2d

|∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)|M (x, ξ)−1 Ψ(x, ξ)|α| Φ(x, ξ)|β| , (1.1.5)

with k ∈ N, deﬁnes a Fréchet topology on S(M ; Φ, Ψ) (notice that these seminorms are actually norms). When M (x, ξ) = ξm , m ∈ R, Φ(x, ξ) = 1, Ψ(x, ξ) = ξρ , 0 ≤ ρ ≤ 1, the m in the literature. class S(M ; Φ, Ψ) is usually denoted by Sρ,0 Now, according to the general theory of Fréchet spaces, a subset B ⊂ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) is bounded if supa∈B a k,S(M ;Φ,Ψ) < ∞ for every k ∈ N. Hence, a bounded subset of S(M ; Φ, Ψ) is also bounded in C ∞ (R2d ). Since every bounded sequence in C ∞ (R2d ) has a convergent subsequence in C ∞ (R2d ) (see, e.g., Treves [190, Theorem 14.4, page 146]), we deduce the following fact. Proposition 1.1.2. For any bounded sequence an ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) the following conditions are equivalent: 1) an converges in S (R2d ); 2) an converges pointwise; 3) an converges in C ∞ (R2d ). Notice that the Schwartz space S(R2d ) is contained in every symbol class S(M ; Φ, Ψ). This is due to the fact that Φ and Ψ are sub-linear, and M satisﬁes a lower bound of the type (1.1.3). Example 1.1.3. Let p(x, ξ) be a polynomial of degree N . Then |p(x, ξ)| (1 + |x| + |ξ|)N . Since the derivatives ∂ξα ∂xβ p(x, ξ), |α| + |β| ≤ N , are polynomials of degree N − |α| − |β|, we see that p ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ), with M (x, ξ) = (1 + |x| + |ξ|)N , and Φ(x, ξ) = Ψ(x, ξ) = 1 + |x| + |ξ|. Actually, since all the weights Φ and Ψ we are considering have sub-linear growth, for any couple of such weights we have p ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) with M (x, ξ) = (1 + |x| + |ξ|)N . The following proposition shows a way to approximate symbols in S(M ; Φ, Ψ) by Schwartz functions. Lemma 1.1.4. Let χ ∈ C0∞ (R2d ) and let Φ and Ψ be any sub-linear weights. Then χ (x, ξ) := χ( x, ξ), 0 ≤ ≤ 1, is bounded in S(1; Φ, Ψ). If moreover χ(x, ξ) = 1 for (x, ξ) in a neighbourhood of the origin, χ tends to 1 in S(M0 ; Φ, Ψ) as → 0, where M0 (x, ξ) is any (temperate) weight which tends to inf inity at inﬁnity.

1.1. Symbol Classes Proof. We have

21

∂ξα ∂xβ χ (x, ξ) = |α|+|β| (∂ξα ∂xβ χ)( x, ξ).

Now there exists a constant C > 0, independent of , such that on the support of χ we have (|x| + |ξ|) ≤ C, and therefore ≤ (C + 1)(1 + |x| + |ξ|)−1 . Since Φ and Ψ are sub-linear weights, it follows that, for every α, β ∈ Nd , |∂ξα ∂xβ χ (x, ξ)| Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d , 0 ≤ ≤ 1,

(1.1.6)

which is the ﬁrst part of the statement. If χ(x, ξ) = 1 for (x, ξ) in a neighbourhood of the origin, we see that ≥ C (1 + |x| + |ξ|)−1 on the support of χ − 1, for a constant C > 0 independent of . Hence, for every L > 0 there exists 0 > 0 such that M0 (x, ξ) > L on the support of χ − 1, if < 0 . As a consequence, |∂ξα ∂xβ (χ (x, ξ) − 1) | L−1 M0 (x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

if < 0 , which is the second part of the statement.

Proposition 1.1.5. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and let M0 be any (temperate) weight which tends to inf inity at inﬁnity. Then there exists a sequence an of Schwartz functions, bounded in S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and convergent to a in S(M M0 ; Φ, Ψ). Proof. Let χ ∈ C0∞ (R2d ), χ = 1 in a neighbourhood of the origin. It suﬃces to set an (x, ξ) = χ(x/n, ξ/n)a(x, ξ)

and apply Lemma 1.1.4.

A key role in the development of the symbolic calculus will be played by the so-called uncertainty principle, i.e., the lower bound Φ(x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ) 1,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

(1.1.7)

which follows from the above hypotheses Φ(x, ξ) ≥ 1 and Ψ(x, ξ) ≥ 1. The function h(x, ξ) := Φ(x, ξ)−1 Ψ(x, ξ)−1

(1.1.8)

will be called the Planck function. As a consequence of the uncertainty principle we have the inclusions S(M hN ; Φ, Ψ) ⊂ S(M ; Φ, Ψ),

N ∈ N.

(1.1.9)

Often in the following we will make use of the strong uncertainty principle, that is Φ(x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ) (1 + |x| + |ξ|)δ ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

(1.1.10)

for some δ > 0. The importance of the strong uncertainty principle is clear when dealing with operators of the form Dξα Dxα , |α| = N , which map S(M ; Φ, Ψ) into

22

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

S(M hN ; Φ, Ψ). If the strong uncertainty principle is satisﬁed we see that symbols in S(M hN ; Φ, Ψ) decay at inﬁnity, together with their derivatives, as much as we want if N is large enough, and in fact S(M hN ; Φ, Ψ) = S(R2d ). (1.1.11) N ∈N

For any given sequence of symbols an ∈ S(M hn ; Φ, Ψ), n ∈ N, we write an (x, ξ) (1.1.12) a(x, ξ) ∼ n

if, for every N ≥ 1, a−

N −1

aj ∈ S(M hN ; Φ, Ψ).

(1.1.13)

j=0

The right-hand side of (1.1.12) is called asymptotic expansion of a. Because of (1.1.9), from (1.1.12) we have that a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and, generally speaking, nothing more. Instead, if the strong uncertainty principle is satisﬁed, the above asymptotic expansion determines a modulo Schwartz functions. More precisely, the following result holds. Proposition 1.1.6. Assume the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10). Let an ∈ S(M hn ; Φ, Ψ), n ∈ N. Then there exists a symbol a(x, ξ) ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) verifying (1.1.12). Moreover a is uniquely determined modulo Schwartz functions. Proof. The uniqueness of a modulo Schwartz functions is a consequence of (1.1.11). Let now χ ∈ C0∞ (R2d ), χ = 1 in a neighbourhood of the origin. Let j be a positive sequence converging to 0, and set Aj (x, ξ) = (1 − χ( j x, j ξ))aj (x, ξ). Hence Aj ∈ S(M hj ). By Lemma 1.1.4, 1 − χ( j x, j ξ) tends to zero in S(M0 ) with, say, M0 (x, ξ) = 1 + |x| + |ξ|. Hence, we can choose j converging to zero so rapidly that

Aj k,S(M M0 hj ) ≤ 2−j , for k ≤ j. ∞ Set a(x, ξ) := j=0 Aj (x, ξ). Since this sum is locally ﬁnite, a(x, ξ) is a well deﬁned smooth function. Moreover, by the strong uncertainty principle, there is N ∈ N such that h−N M0 . Hence, if k ≤ N , N −1 Aj − a j=0

k;S(M hN −N )

∞ Aj

≤

j=N ∞

k;S(M M0 hN )

Aj k;S(M M0 hN )

j=N ∞ j=N

Aj k;S(M M0 hj ) < ∞.

1.2. Basic Calculus

23

Then, for every ﬁxed k, N , we choose N such that N − N ≥ N , and we obtain N −1 − Aj a

j=0

k,S(M hN )

N −1 a − Aj

j=0

k,S(M hN −N )

< ∞.

Since, for j ≥ N , Aj ∈ S(M hj ) ⊂ S(M hN ), we see that N −1 Aj a − j=0

k,S(M hN )

< ∞.

The same holds with aj in place of Aj , because Aj − aj ∈ S(R2d ). This concludes the proof.

Remark 1.1.7. It is worth noticing that (1.1.13) could give signiﬁcant information from a micro-local point of view, even if the strong uncertainty principle is not satisﬁed (e.g. looking at sub-regions, as cones, where the strong uncertainty principal holds). Hence in the next section we will deal with asymptotic expansions without assuming the strong uncertainty principle.

1.2 Basic Calculus 1.2.1 Action on S Let a ∈ S (R2d ), τ ∈ R, and consider the operator Opτ (a) deﬁned formally by ¯ dξ, ¯ u ∈ S(Rd ). (1.2.1) Opτ (a)u(x) = ei(x−y)ξ a((1 − τ )x + τ y, ξ)u(y) dy We will call a the τ -symbol of the pseudo-diﬀerential operator Opτ (a). Important special cases are obtained when τ = 0, τ = 1 and τ = 1/2, which correspond to the so-called left quantization a(x, D) in (1.0.1), the right quantization in (1.0.8) and the Weyl quantization aw in (1.0.10), respectively. The rigorous meaning we give to (1.2.1) is the following one: Opτ (a) is the continuous operator S(Rd ) → S (Rd ) with distribution kernel Kτ ∈ S (R2d ) given by −1 a((1 − τ )x + τ y, ξ). (1.2.2) Kτ (x, y) = (2π)−d/2 Fξ→x−y This means that Opτ (a)u, v = Kτ , v ⊗ u,

u, v ∈ S(Rd ),

(1.2.3)

where ·, · stands for the usual duality between temperate distributions and Schwartz functions. Observe that when a ∈ S(R2d ) the integral in (1.2.1) is absolutely convergent and the action just deﬁned reduces to (1.2.1). Other interpretations are given in Proposition 1.2.3 below.

24

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Proposition 1.2.1. The correspondence a → Kτ is an isomorphism of S(R2d ), of S (R2d ), and also of L2 (R2d ). The inverse map is given by a(x, ξ) = (2π)d/2 Fy→ξ Kτ (x + τ y, x − (1 − τ )y).

(1.2.4)

Proof. The partial Fourier transform as well as the composition with the change of variable T(x, y) = ((1 − τ )x + τ y, x − y) are isomorphisms of S(R2d ), of S (R2d ), and also of L2 (R2d ). This gives the ﬁrst part of the statement. The second part is just an easy computation. In particular, any pseudo-diﬀerential operator corresponds to only one τ symbol. Operators with Schwartz symbols, namely Schwartz kernels, are called (globally) regularizing operators. They are characterized by the property that they extend to continuous operators S (Rd ) → S(Rd ). The following simple result will be used often in the following. Proposition 1.2.2. For any given sequence an ∈ S (R2d ), convergent to a ∈ S (R2d ), it turns out that Opτ (an )u → Opτ (a)u in S (Rd ) for every u ∈ S(Rd ). Proof. The kernels of Opτ (an ) converge to that of Opτ (a) in S (R2d ), since the map a → Kτ is continuous on S (R2d ). Proposition 1.2.3. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Then the integral in (1.2.1) is well deﬁned as an iterated integral. Moreover, Opτ (a)u, u ∈ S(Rd ), deﬁned as a distribution in (1.2.3), coincides with the function expressed by that integral. Proof. Since u ∈ S(Rd ) and all the derivatives of a are dominated by the same function M (x, ξ), having polynomial growth, we see by repeated integrations by parts that the integral ei(x−y)ξ a((1 − τ )x + τ y, ξ)u(y) dy deﬁnes a function b(x, ξ) satisfying the estimates |b(x, ξ)| xs ξ−N , for some s ∈ R and every N . This gives the ﬁrst part of the statement. This estimate also implies that we can apply Fubini’s theorem and interchange the integrals with respect to x and ξ in ei(x−y)ξ a((1 − τ )x + τ y, ξ)u(y)v(x) dy ¯ dξ ¯ dx. The change of variable )x+τ y, x−y) then reduces that expression T(x, y) = ((1−τ to (2π)−d/2 a, F2−1 (v ⊗ u) ◦ T −1 , (F2 being the partial Fourier transform in the second variable), which is exactly the meaning of the right-hand side of (1.2.3).

1.2. Basic Calculus

25

Now we show that every pseudo-diﬀerential operator Opτ1 (a) can be written as Opτ2 (b) for another symbol b, with a precise dependence of a. To study this problem we introduce the following family of Fourier multipliers in R2d : a(y, η) dy ¯ dη, ¯ a ∈ S (R2d ), τ ∈ R. (1.2.5) eiτ Dx ·Dξ a(x, ξ) := ei(xy+ξη) eiτ yη In particular, for τ = 0 we have the identity operator. These operators deﬁne isomorphisms of S(R2d ) and S (R2d ), because such are the Fourier transform in R2d and the multiplication by eiτ yη . Moreover, as operators on S(R2d ) and S (R2d ) they satisfy the group property eiτ1 Dx ·Dξ eiτ2 Dx ·Dξ = ei(τ1 +τ2 )Dx ·Dξ ,

τ1 , τ2 ∈ R,

(1.2.6)

as one sees at once from their deﬁnition. Also, by Parseval’s formula, eiτ Dx ·Dξ is in fact a unitary operator on L2 (R2d ). Now we show other useful expressions for eiτ Dx ·Dξ a, when a ∈ S(R2d ). Since the Fourier transform of (2π|τ |)−d e−iyη/τ , τ = 0, is (2π)−d eiτ xξ (x and ξ being the variables dual to y and η respectively), cf. Hörmander [119, Vol. I, Theorem a b, for a ∈ S(R2d ), b ∈ S (R2d ), cf. 7.6.1], and using the formula a ∗ b = (2π)d (0.2.4), we see that, for τ = 0, iτ Dx ·Dξ −d a = |τ | ¯ dη, ¯ a ∈ S(R2d ). (1.2.7) e e−iyη/τ a(x + y, ξ + η) dy By changes of variables we obtain from this formula the following two expressions, as absolutely convergent integrals (τ = 0): eiτ Dx ·Dξ a = e−iyη a(x + y, ξ + τ η) dy ¯ dη, ¯ a ∈ S(R2d ), (1.2.8) eiτ Dx ·Dξ a =

e−i(y−x)(η−ξ) a((1 − τ )x + τ y, η) dy ¯ dη, ¯

a ∈ S(R2d ).

(1.2.9)

We now study the action of the operator eiτ Dx ·Dξ on the class of symbols S(M ). According to Remark 1.1.7, we do not assume the strong uncertainty principle. Theorem 1.2.4. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Then b(x, ξ) := eiτ Dx ·Dξ a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and the following asymptotic expansion holds: (α!)−1 τ |α| ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ). (1.2.10) b(x, ξ) ∼ α

Moreover the map eiτ Dx ·Dξ is continuous on S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Formula (1.2.10) means that (α!)−1 τ |α| ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ) ∈ S(M hN ; Φ, Ψ), b(x, ξ) − |α|
26

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

where h is the Planck function in (1.1.8). Notice that the asymptotic expansion (1.2.10) could be obtained formally by considering the Taylor expansion of the exponential eiτ Dx ·Dξ . Proof. Suppose ﬁrst a ∈ S(R2d ) and, for every N ∈ N, N ≥ 1, consider the Schwartz function bN (x, ξ) := eiτ Dx ·Dξ a(x, ξ) − (α!)−1 τ |α| ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ). (1.2.11) |α|
We claim that each seminorm of bN in S(M hN ) is estimated by a seminorm of a in S(M ). To prove this, we use the formula (1.2.8) for eiτ Dx ·Dξ a. That integral is absolutely convergent (we can suppose τ = 0); hence we can regard it as an iterated integral, in the indicated order. We then Taylor expand the function a(x + y, ξ + τ η) at η = 0: a(x + y, ξ + τ η) = (α!)−1 ∂ξα a(y + x, ξ)(τ η)α + rN (x, ξ, y, η), |α|
where rN (x, ξ, y, η) = N

|α|=N

−1

1

(α!)

0

(1 − t)N −1 ∂ξα a(x + y, ξ + tτ η)(τ η)α dt.

As an iterated integral, we have ¯ dη ¯ = τ |α| ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ), e−iyη ∂ξα a(x + y, ξ)(τ η)αdy α −iyη where we have used = (−τ Dy )α e−iyη , integrated by parts, the formula (τ η) e and ﬁnally used u (η) d¯η = u(0), u ∈ S(Rd ). if−iyη Hence, we have bN (x, ξ) = e rN (x, ξ, y, η)dy dη. ¯ By Fubini’s theorem it suﬃces to prove the desired estimates, uniformly with respect to t ∈ [0, 1], for any term e−iyη ∂ξα a(x + y, ξ + tτ η)(τ η)α dy ¯ dη ¯ ¯ dη, ¯ |α| = N. = τN e−iyη ∂ξα Dyα a(x + y, ξ + tτ η) dy

To this end, we use the identity e−iyη = y−2N (1−Δη )N η−2N (1−Δy )N e−iyη , valid for every N ∈ N, and we integrate by parts in the last integral, which is then dominated by η−2N |(1 − Δy )N [y−2N (1 − Δη )N ∂ξα Dyα a(x + y, ξ + tτ η)]| dy ¯ dη. ¯ |τ |N

1.2. Basic Calculus

27

By (0.1.1) and Leibniz’ rule, the expression under the integral sign can be estimated by (see (1.1.5))

a 2N +4N ,S(M ) η−2N y−2N (M hN )(x + y, ξ + tτ η)

a 2N +4N ,S(M ) η−2N y−2N (M hN )(x, ξ)(1 + |y| + |η|)s+2N s , since M , Φ and Ψ are temperate weights (without loss of generality we assumed the constant s in the temperance estimates to be the same for the three weights). Hence if we choose N satisfying −2N + (1 + 2N )s < −2d, we obtain |bN (x, ξ)| a 2N +4N ,S(M ) M (x, ξ)h(x, ξ)N ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

The estimates for the derivatives of bN follow similarly. Indeed, (α!)−1 τ |α| ∂ξα Dxα ∂xγ ∂ξβ a(x, ξ), ∂xγ ∂ξβ bN (x, ξ) := eiτ Dx ·Dξ ∂xγ ∂ξβ a(x, ξ) − |α|
so that one can repeat the above arguments with ∂xγ ∂ξβ a(x, ξ) in place of a. This gives the claim at the beginning of the present proof. Let now a ∈ S(M ). By Proposition 1.1.5 there is a sequence an of Schwartz functions convergent to a in S (R2d ) and bounded in S(M ). It follows from what we already proved that the sequence (n) bN (x, ξ) := eiτ Dx ·Dξ an (x, ξ) − (α!)−1 τ |α| ∂ξα Dxα an (x, ξ) |α|
is bounded in S(M hN ). Moreover, it is convergent in S (R2d ) to the distribution bN (x, ξ) given in (1.2.11), since the operators eiτ Dx ·Dξ and ∂ξα Dxα are continuous (n)

on S (R2d ). It follows from Proposition 1.1.2 that bN is convergent in C ∞ (R2d ), so that bN is in fact a smooth function in S(M hN ). The continuity of the map eiτ Dx ·Dξ on S(M ) also follows from these arguments. The following formula (1.2.12) expresses the τ2 -symbol of a pseudo-diﬀerential operator in terms of its τ1 -symbol. Proposition 1.2.5. Let a ∈ S (R2d ), τ1 , τ2 ∈ R. We have Opτ1 (a) = Opτ2 ei(τ1 −τ2 )Dx ·Dξ a .

(1.2.12)

Proof. First we consider the case τ2 = 0. By Proposition 1.2.2, it suﬃces to consider Schwartz symbols, because S(R2d ) is dense in S (R2d ) and ei(τ1 −τ2 )Dx ·Dξ is continuous on S (R2d ). Now, it follows from (1.2.9) that, for a ∈ S(R2d ), u ∈ S(Rd ), Op0 eiτ Dx ·Dξ a u(x)

e−i(y−x)(η−ξ) a((1 − τ )x + τ y, η)u(z) dy = ei(x−z)ξ ¯ dη ¯ dz ¯ dξ ¯

28

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

=

i(x−y)η

e

a((1 − τ )x + τ y, η)

i(y−z)ξ

e

u(z) dz ¯ dξ ¯

dy ¯ dη, ¯

where we repeatedly applied Fubini’s theorem. By the inversion formula for the Fourier transform this last expression is just Opτ (a)u. This proves the desired result for τ2 = 0. In the general case, we observe that by what we have just proved, Op0 eiτ1 Dx ·Dξ a = Opτ1 (a), and Op0 eiτ2 Dx ·Dξ b = Opτ2 (b). If we choose b = ei(τ1 −τ2 )Dx ·Dξ a in this last formula and apply (1.2.6) we see that (1.2.12) is veriﬁed. Remark 1.2.6. It follows from Proposition 1.2.5 and Theorem 1.2.4 that if the τ1 symbol aτ1 of a pseudo-diﬀerential operator belongs to a class S(M ; Φ, Ψ), then its τ2 -symbol aτ2 belongs to the same class as well. Moreover, one has the asymptotic expansion (α!)−1 (τ1 − τ2 )|α| ∂ξα Dxα aτ1 (x, ξ). (1.2.13) aτ2 (x, ξ) ∼ α

We now study the action on S(Rd ) of pseudo-diﬀerential operators with symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Proposition 1.2.7. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ), τ ∈ R. Then the operator Opτ (a) is continuous on S(Rd ). Proof. By Proposition 1.2.5 and Theorem 1.2.4 it suﬃces to consider the case τ = 0. Now, by Proposition 1.2.3 the distribution a(x, D)u, u ∈ S(Rd ), is in fact a function given by the absolutely convergent integral u(ξ) dξ. ¯ a(x, D)u(x) = eixξ a(x, ξ) The estimates |∂xα eixξ a(x, ξ) | M (x, ξ)ξ|α| xs ξs+|α| , valid for some s ≥ 0, show that it is possible to diﬀerentiate under the integral sign, and we deduce that a(x, D)u is in fact a smooth function. We also see that every derivative ∂ α a(x, D)u is a ﬁnite sum of terms of the same form as a(x, D)u, with a diﬀerent symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and for a new Schwartz function u. Hence to conclude the proof it is suﬃcient to prove that x−2N a(x, D)u(x) is dominated, for every N ∈ N, by a ﬁxed power of x. The identity x2N eixξ = (1 − Δξ )N eixξ and an integration by parts yield u(ξ))| dξ. ¯ x2N |a(x, D)u(x)| ≤ |(1 − Δξ )N (a(x, ξ)

1.2. Basic Calculus

29

Since, for every N ∈ N and some s ≥ 0, we have

|(1 − Δξ )N (a(x, ξ) u(ξ))| M (x, ξ)ξ−N xs ξs−N , we obtain x2N |a(x, D)u(x)| xs , as desired.

Remark 1.2.8. It follows from the proof of Proposition 1.2.7 that the map (a, u) → a(x, D)u from S(M ; Φ, Ψ) × S(Rd ) to S(Rd ) is in fact continuous.

1.2.2 Adjoint and Transposed Operator. Action on S Let a ∈ S (R2d ). The formal adjoint of Opτ (a) is deﬁned as the unique operator Opτ (a)∗ : S(Rd ) → S (Rd ) satisfying (Opτ (a)u, v) = (u, Opτ (a)∗ v),

for every u, v ∈ S(Rd ).

Here we set (w, v) = w, v, for w ∈ S (Rd ) v ∈ S(Rd ), or w ∈ S(Rd ) v ∈ S (Rd ), where ·, · stands for the usual duality between temperate distributions and Schwartz functions. It is easy to write Opτ (a)∗ in the pseudo-diﬀerential form. Indeed, if K(x, y) denotes the distribution kernel of Opτ (a), that of Opτ (a)∗ is K(y, x). On the other hand, by (1.2.2), −1 K(y, x) = (2π)−d/2 Fξ→x−y a((τ x + (1 − τ )y, ξ),

which is the kernel of Op1−τ (a). Hence Opτ (a)∗ = Op1−τ (a),

a ∈ S (R2d ).

(1.2.14)

Let us now point out two important consequences of this formula. First, the formal adjoint of an operator a(x, D), with a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ), is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in the same class. Second, real-valued Weyl symbols give rise to (formally) self-adjoint operators. Proposition 1.2.9. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Then the formal adjoint of Opτ (a) is the pseudo-diﬀerential operator with τ -symbol b(x, ξ) = ei(1−2τ )Dx ·Dξ a(x, ξ) ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Moreover we have the asymptotic expansion (α!)−1 (1 − 2τ )|α| ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ). b(x, ξ) ∼ α

Proof. The desired result follows at once from (1.2.14), Proposition 1.2.5 and Theorem 1.2.4. Consider now the Weyl operator aw = Op1/2 (a) (see (1.0.10)).

30

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Proposition 1.2.10. Let a ∈ S (R2d ). Then ∗

a = a ⇐⇒ (aw ) = aw . Proof. This is a consequence of (1.2.14) with τ = 1/2.

Similarly, one can consider the transposed operator of Opτ (a), deﬁned as the unique operator t Opτ (a) : S(Rd ) → S (Rd ) satisfying t Opτ (a)u, v = u, Opτ (a)v,

for every u, v ∈ S(Rd ).

(1.2.15)

Remark 1.2.11. It follows at once from this deﬁnition that t (t Opτ (a)) = Opτ (a). Similarly, (Opτ (a)∗ )∗ = Opτ (a). Indeed, Opτ (a)∗ u = t Opτ (a)u. If K(x, y) denotes the distribution kernel of Opτ (a), that of t Opτ (a) is K(y, x). Hence, by arguing as above we obtain the formula t

Opτ (a(x, ξ)) = Op1−τ (a(x, −ξ)),

a ∈ S (R2d ).

(1.2.16)

Proposition 1.2.12. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Then the transpose of Opτ (a) is the pseudo-diﬀerential operator with τ -symbol b(x, ξ) = ei(1−2τ )Dx ·Dξ a(x, −ξ) ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Moreover we have the asymptotic expansion b(x, ξ) ∼

(α!)−1 (1 − 2τ )α ∂ξα Dxα a(x, −ξ). α

Proof. The desired result follows at once from (1.2.16), Proposition 1.2.5 and Theorem 1.2.4. Proposition 1.2.13. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ), τ ∈ R. Then the operator Opτ (a) extends to a continuous operator S (Rd ) → S (Rd ). Proof. We know from Proposition 1.2.12 that the transposed operator t Opτ (a) is still a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with τ -symbol in the same class S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Hence by Proposition 1.2.7 it maps S(Rd ) → S(Rd ). The desired extension of Opτ (a) is therefore given by Opτ (a)u, v = u,t Opτ (a)v,

u ∈ S (Rd ), v ∈ S(Rd ).

Remark 1.2.14. The action on S (Rd ) of a pseudo-diﬀerential operator is deﬁned in Proposition 1.2.13 exactly to make the relation (1.2.15) true for every v ∈ S (Rd ), u ∈ S(Rd ).

1.2. Basic Calculus

31

1.2.3 Composition of Operators We now consider the composition of two pseudo-diﬀerential operators with symbols in the above classes. Notice that the composition is well deﬁned on S(Rd ) and on S (Rd ) by Propositions 1.2.7 and 1.2.13. Remark 1.2.15. As a consequence of Propositions 1.2.7 and 1.2.13, if a ∈ S(M ) and b ∈ S(R2d ) (i.e., b(x, D) is regularizing), we see that both the compositions a(x, D)b(x, D) and b(x, D)a(x, D) are regularizing operators. Theorem 1.2.16. Let a1 ∈ S(M1 ; Φ, Ψ), a2 ∈ S(M2 ; Φ, Ψ). Then, as operators on S(Rd ) or on S (Rd ), we have a1 (x, D)a2 (x, D) = b(x, D), where b(x, ξ) = eiDy ·Dη a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ) ∈ S(M1 M2 ; Φ, Ψ), (1.2.17) η=ξ,y=x

with the asymptotic expansion b(x, ξ) ∼ (α!)−1 ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ)Dxα a2 (x, ξ).

(1.2.18)

α

Moreover the map (a1 , a2 ) → b is continuous from S(M1 ; Φ, Ψ) × S(M2 ; Φ, Ψ) into S(M1 M2 ; Φ, Ψ). Proof. Consider ﬁrst the case in which a1 , a2 ∈ S(R2d ). Then, for u ∈ S(Rd ), we have F (a2 (x, D)u) (η) = eiy(ξ−η) a2 (y, ξ) u(ξ) dξ ¯ dy. ¯ Hence a1 (x, D)a2 (x, D) = b(x, D), with b(x, ξ) = e−iyη a1 (x, ξ + η)a2 (x + y, ξ) dy ¯ dη. ¯

(1.2.19)

By (1.2.8) with τ = 1, this proves the equality in (1.2.17) when a1 , a2 ∈ S(R2d ). Let still a1 , a2 ∈ S(R2d ) and set bN (x, ξ) = eiDy ·Dη a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ) η=ξ,y=x − (α!)−1 ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ)Dxα a2 (x, ξ). (1.2.20) |α|
We claim that every seminorm of bN in S(M1 M2 hN ) is estimated by the product of a seminorm of a1 in S(M1 ) and a seminorm of a2 in S(M2 ). This can be proved by repeating the same arguments as in the ﬁrst part of the proof of Theorem 1.2.4. Namely, in (1.2.19) one considers the Taylor expansion at η = 0 of the function a1 (x, ξ + η)a2 (x + y, ξ): (α!)−1 ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ)a2 (x + y, ξ)η α + rN (x, ξ, y, η), a1 (x, ξ + η)a2 (x + y, ξ) = |α|
32

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

where rN (x, ξ, y, η) = N

(α!)−1

0

|α|=N

1

(1 − t)N −1 (∂ξα a1 )(x, ξ + tη)a2 (x + y, ξ)η α dt.

Since, as iterated integrals, e−iyη ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ)a2 (x + y, ξ)η αdy ¯ dη ¯ = ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ)Dxα a2 (x, ξ), it suﬃces to prove the desired estimate, uniformly with respect to t ∈ [0, 1], for every term e−iyη ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ + tη)a2 (x + y, ξ)η α dy ¯ dη ¯ ¯ dη, ¯ |α| = N. = e−iyη ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ + tη)Dyα a2 (x + y, ξ) dy This can be achieved by repeated integration by parts, the relevant estimates being the following ones, with k = |δ| + |β| + |γ|: |∂xδ ∂ξβ ∂ηγ a1 (x, ξ + tη)| ≤ a1 k,S(M1 ) M1 (x, ξ + tη)Φ(x, ξ + tη)−|δ| Ψ(x, ξ + tη)−|β| a1 k,S(M1 ) M1 (x, ξ)Φ(x, ξ)−|δ| Ψ(x, ξ)−|β| ηs(1+|δ|+|β|) , and |∂xδ ∂ξβ ∂yγ a2 (x + y, ξ)| ≤ a2 k,S(M2 ) M2 (x + y, ξ)Φ(x + y, ξ)−|δ| Ψ(x + y, ξ)−|β| a2 k,S(M2 ) M2 (x, ξ)Φ(x, ξ)−|δ| Ψ(x, ξ)−|β| ys(1+|δ|+|β|) , where we used the temperance property of M1 , M2 , Φ, Ψ (and s is the constant in such temperance estimates). This gives the desired claim. Suppose now a1 ∈ S(M1 ) and a2 ∈ S(M2 ). Observe that, for ﬁxed x, ξ, the function a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ) belongs to S(M1 (x, η)M2 (y, ξ); Φ(y, ξ), Ψ(x, η)), as symbol class in R2d y,η . Hence, by Theorem 1.2.4 we see that the distribution eiDy ·Dη a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ) is in fact a smooth function of y, η and it makes sense to evaluate it at η = ξ, y = x. Let therefore b(x, ξ) be given by (1.2.17). For j = 1, 2 consider, according to Proposition 1.1.5, a sequence of symbols (n) aj , bounded in S(Mj ) and converging to aj in S(Mj M0 ) with, say, M0 (x, ξ) = (n)

1 + |x| + |ξ|. It follows from Remark 1.2.8 that a2 (x, D)u, u ∈ S(Rd ), converges

1.2. Basic Calculus

33 (n)

(n)

to a2 (x, D)u in S(Rd ) and a1 (x, D)a2 (x, D)u converges to a1 (x, D)a2 (x, D)u in S(Rd ). On the other hand, it follows from Theorem 1.2.4 that the sequence of func(n) (n) tions eiDy ·Dη a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ), for every ﬁxed x, ξ, converges to eiDy ·Dη a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ) in S((M1 M0 )(x, η) (M2 M0 )(y, ξ); Φ(y, ξ), Ψ(x, η)) 2d (as symbol class in R2d y,η ), hence pointwise in Ry,η . The sequence (n)

(n)

b(n) (x, ξ) := eiDy ·Dη a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ)|η=ξ,y=x , converges therefore pointwise to b(x, ξ). Since, for the ﬁrst part of the proof, b(n) is bounded in S(M1 M2 ), by Proposition 1.1.2 b(n) → b in C ∞ (R2d ), so that b ∈ S(M1 M2 ). Again by Proposition 1.1.2, b(n) → b in S (R2d ) as well, and therefore b(n) (x, D)u → b(x, D)u in S (Rd ) by Proposition 1.2.2. This shows that a1 (x, D)a2 (x, D) = b(x, D). Finally, to prove the desired asymptotic expansion, we consider the sequence (n) (n) (n) bN (x, ξ) := eiDy ·Dη a1 (x, η)a2 (y, ξ)

η=ξ,y=x

−

(n)

(n)

(α!)−1 ∂ξα a1 (x, ξ)Dxα a2 (x, ξ),

|α|
which is bounded in S(M1 M2 hN ) for the ﬁrst part of the proof, and converges in C ∞ (R2d ) to the function bN (x, ξ) given in (1.2.20), by what we just observed. Hence bN ∈ S(M1 M2 hN ). Also, the continuity of the bilinear map (a1 , a2 ) → b from S(M1 ) × S(M2 ) into S(M1 M2 ) follows. By combining Theorem 1.2.16 with the Remark 1.2.6 it follows that for every τ1 , τ2 , τ ∈ R, a ∈ S(M1 ), b ∈ S(M2 ) we have Opτ1 (a)Opτ2 (b) = Opτ (c) for a suitable c ∈ S(M1 M2 ). An asymptotic expansion of the symbol can also be obtained from (1.2.18) after writing Opτ1 (a) and Opτ2 (b) as pseudo-diﬀerential operators with 0-symbols and then coming back to the τ -symbol, hence using repeatedly (1.2.13). This is however quite a long task involving identities of binomial coeﬃcients and which is detailed, e.g., in Boggiatto, Buzano and Rodino [19] and Shubin [183]. Instead, here we will present a fast heuristic approach which is useful to ﬁnd the desired asymptotic expansions. We consider, for simplicity, just the case of the Weyl quantization (τ1 = τ2 = τ = 1/2), which is the most important one after the standard quantization.

34

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Theorem 1.2.17. Let a ∈ S(M1 ; Φ, Ψ), b ∈ S(M2 ; Φ, Ψ). Then aw bw = cw for a symbol c ∈ S(M1 M2 ; Φ, Ψ). Moreover c(x, ξ) has the asymptotic expansion (−1)|β| (α!β!)−1 2−|α+β| ∂ξα Dxβ a(x, ξ)∂ξβ Dxα b(x, ξ). c(x, ξ) ∼ α,β

Proof. The ﬁrst part of the statement was already observed above. For the asymptotic expansion we argue heuristically as follows. We know from Theorem 1.2.16 and Proposition 1.2.5 that c is given by i i i eiDy ·Dη e 2 Dx ·Dη a(x, η)e 2 Dy ·Dξ b(y, ξ) . c(x, ξ) = e− 2 Dx ·Dξ η=ξ,y=x

Now, the key observation is that we can bring the operator e− 2 Dx ·Dξ before the i evaluation at y = x, η = ξ, after modifying it as e− 2 (Dx +Dy )·(Dξ +Dη ) . This is seen by expanding this exponential in Taylor series and applying the chain rule1 . After that, we can rearrange the exponentials together. We obtain i c(x, ξ) = e 2 (Dy ·Dη −Dx ·Dξ ) a(x, η)b(y, ξ) . (1.2.21) i

η=ξ,y=x

A further Taylor expansion of this exponential gives the desired asymptotic expansion, after observing that 1 j!

j i (Dy · Dη − Dx · Dξ ) a(x, η)b(y, ξ) 2 η=ξ,y=x |β| −1 −j α β = (−1) (α!β!) 2 ∂ξ Dx a(x, ξ)∂ξβ Dxα b(x, ξ). |α+β|=j

Remark 1.2.18. If we denote by σ(x, y; ξ, η) = ξy − xη the standard symplectic form in R2d , we see that (1.2.21) can be rewritten as i c(x, ξ) = e 2 σ(Dx ,Dy ;Dη ,Dξ ) a(x, η)b(y, ξ) , (1.2.22) y=x,η=ξ

which suggests a relationship between Weyl quantization and symplectic geometry. Indeed, the Weyl calculus enjoys a property of invariance with respect to symplectic changes of variables. However, we will not discuss this in the present book.

1.3 Global Regularity In this section we discuss one of the main motivations and applications of the symbolic calculus just developed, namely the construction of inverses of elliptic operators modulo regularizing operators. 1 Basically,

this argument relies on the observation that for a diﬀerentiable function f (x, y) of ∂f ∂f d f (x, x) = + . dx ∂x ∂y y=x

two real variables, it turns out

1.3. Global Regularity

35

1.3.1 Hypoellipticity and Construction of the Parametrix We introduce two particular symbol classes. Deﬁnition 1.3.1. A symbol a is called (globally) elliptic in the class S(M ; Φ, Ψ) if a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and for some R > 0, |a(x, ξ)| M (x, ξ),

for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R.

(1.3.1)

In the sequel we shall also refer to the following more general deﬁnition. Deﬁnition 1.3.2. A symbol a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) is called (globally) hypoelliptic if there exist a temperate weight M0 (x, ξ) and R > 0 such that |a(x, ξ)| M0 (x, ξ),

for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R,

(1.3.2)

and, for every α, β ∈ Nd , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| |a(x, ξ)|Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R.

(1.3.3)

We will denote by Hypo(M, M0 ; Φ, Ψ), or also for short by Hypo(M, M0 ), the class of such symbols. Remark 1.3.3. In particular, if (1.3.2) holds with M0 (x, ξ) = M (x, ξ), then a is elliptic. Vice versa, every elliptic symbol a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) is hypoelliptic, since (1.3.2) holds with M0 (x, ξ) = M (x, ξ), whereas (1.3.3) is true because |a(x, ξ)| M (x, ξ), for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R. It is important to observe that we can talk about pseudo-diﬀerential operators with a hypoelliptic symbol without specifying the type of quantization, as one sees by combining (1.2.12) and the following result. Proposition 1.3.4. Assume the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10). Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) be a hypoelliptic symbol and τ ∈ R. Then the symbol eiτ Dx ·Dξ a is hypoelliptic as well. Proof. Because of (1.2.10), we have, for every N > 1, eiτ Dx ·Dξ a − a = (α!)−1 τ |α| ∂ξα Dxα a + rN , 0<|α|
where rN ∈ S(M hN ; Φ, Ψ), with h as in (1.1.8). Hence, let a satisfy (1.3.2) and (1.3.3). Since h(x, ξ) → 0 as (x, ξ) → ∞ by the strong uncertainty principle, we see that eiτ Dx ·Dξ a will satisfy the same inequalities, possibly for a larger R, if we prove that |∂ξβ ∂xγ b(x, ξ)| |a(x, ξ)|h(x, ξ)Ψ(x, ξ)−|β| Φ(x, ξ)−|γ| ,

|x| + |ξ| ≥ R,

for b(x, ξ) = rN (x, ξ), with N large enough, or b(x, ξ) = ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ), |α| > 0. This is clear when b(x, ξ) = rN (x, ξ), if N is chosen so that M hN M0 h (again,

36

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

this choice is possible by the strong uncertainty principle). On the other hand, for b(x, ξ) = ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ) we deduce from (1.3.3) that |∂ξβ ∂xγ b(x, ξ)| |a(x, ξ)|h(x, ξ)|α| Ψ(x, ξ)−|β| Φ(x, ξ)−|γ| . Since |α| > 0, this gives the desired estimate.

Lemma 1.3.5. Let a ∈ Hypo(M, M0 ; Φ, Ψ). Then, if p is an integer, or if p is any complex number and a(x, ξ) does not take values in R− ∪ {0} for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R, it turns out, for every α, β ∈ Nd , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)p | |a(x, ξ)|p Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R.

(1.3.4)

In particular, ap ∈ S(M p ; Φ, Ψ) if p ≥ 0 and ap ∈ S(M0p ; Φ, Ψ) if p < 0 (the power ap is deﬁned by taking the principal branch of the logarithm). Proof. First of all we observe that, by (1.3.2), a(x, ξ) = 0 for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R. Now, let p be an integer, or let p be any complex number and assume that a(x, ξ) does not take values in R− ∪ {0} for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R. Then every derivative ∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)p , |α| + |β| > 0, is well deﬁned there, and by induction one sees that it is a linear combination of terms of the form a(x, ξ)p−k

k

γ

∂ξ j ∂xδj a(x, ξ),

j=1

with 1 ≤ k ≤ |α|+|β|, γj , δj ∈ Nd , j = 1, . . . , k, γ1 +. . .+γk = α, δ1 +. . .+δk = β. The desired estimate then follows from (1.3.3). The last part of the statement is immediate. Theorem 1.3.6. Assume the strong uncertainty principle and let a ∈ Hypo(M, M0 ; Φ, Ψ). Then there exist b ∈ S(M0−1 ; Φ, Ψ) and regularizing operators S1 , S2 such that (1.3.5) b(x, D)a(x, D) = I + S1 , a(x, D)b(x, D) = I + S2 , as operators on S(Rd ) and on S (Rd ). Such a map b(x, D) is called a parametrix of a(x, D). Proof. Let b1 (x, ξ) = a−1 (x, ξ) for |x| + |ξ| ≥ R and b1 ∈ C ∞ (R2d ). We claim that b1 (x, D)a(x, D) = I − r1 (x, D),

(1.3.6)

where r1 (x, ξ) ∈ S(h). Indeed, since b1 ∈ S(M0−1 ) by Lemma 1.3.5, we deduce from (1.2.18) that r1 (x, ξ) −

0<|α|
(α!)−1 ∂ξα a(x, ξ)−1 Dxα a(x, ξ) ∈ S(M M0−1 hN ).

1.3. Global Regularity

37

By the strong uncertainty principle we have M M0−1 hN h for h large enough, so that S(M M0−1 hN ) ⊂ S(h). On the other hand, by (1.3.3) and (1.3.4) we see that, in the above sum, ∂ξα a(x, ξ)−1 Dxα a(x, ξ) ∈ S(h|α| ). This gives the claim. Now, let rn (x, ξ) ∈ S(hn ), n ≥ 0, be the symbol of r1 (x, D)n and, according to Proposition 1.1.6, let p(x, ξ) ∈ S(1) satisfy p(x, ξ) ∼ n rn (x, ξ). By using

N

r1 (x, D)

n

(1 − r1 (x, D)) = I − r1 (x, D)N +1 ,

n=0

we see from (1.3.6) that the symbol of the operator p(x, D)b1 (x, D)a(x, D) − I = −r(x, D)

N +1

+

p(x, D) −

N

r1 (x, D)

n

b1 (x, D)a(x, D)

(1.3.7)

n=0

belongs to S(hN +1 ) for every N (indeed, we know from (1.3.6) that the operator b1 (x, D)a(x, D) has symbol in S(1)). So the ﬁrst equation in (1.3.5) holds for a suitable S1 , b(x, ξ) being the symbol of p(x, D)b1 (x, D). By arguing similarly one ﬁnds an operator c(x, D) such that a(x, D)c(x, D) = I + T , for some regularizing operator T . Let us now prove that b(x, D) − c(x, D) is a regularizing operator. This will give the second equation in (1.3.5). To this end, we observe that b(x, D) = b(x, D)I = b(x, D) (a(x, D)c(x, D) − T ) = b(x, D)a(x, D)c(x, D) + T1 and c(x, D) = Ic(x, D) = (b(x, D)a(x, D) − S1 ) c(x, D) = b(x, D)a(x, D)c(x, D) + T2 with T1 and T2 regularizing. By subtracting these two equations we see that b(x, D) − c(x, D) = T1 − T2 is a regularizing operator. Remark 1.3.7. Observe that the arguments at the end of the proof of Theorem 1.3.6 show that the parametrix, independently of the pseudo-diﬀerential representation, is unique modulo regularizing operators; namely, if Bj : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ), j = 1, 2, extends to a continuous operator S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) and moreover Bj a(x, D) = I + Sj and a(x, D)Bj = I + Sj , with Sj and Sj regularizing, then B1 − B2 is regularizing. Deﬁnition 1.3.8. We say that a linear continuous map A : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ), S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) is globally regular if u ∈ S (Rd ) and Au ∈ S(Rd ) imply u ∈ S(Rd ). Corollary 1.3.9. Assume the strong uncertainty principle and let a be a symbol in Hypo(M, M0 ; Φ, Ψ). Then a(x, D) is globally regular.

38

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Proof. By Theorem 1.3.6 there exists b ∈ S(M0−1 ; Φ, Ψ) such that b(x, D)a(x, D) = I +R on S (Rd ), where R is a regularizing operator. If u ∈ S (Rd ) and Au ∈ S(Rd ), u = b(x, D)a(x, D)u − Ru = b(x, D)f − Ru ∈ S(Rd ), for R maps S (Rd ) into S(Rd ) and b(x, D) maps S(Rd ) into itself (Proposition 1.2.7).

1.3.2 Slow Variation and Construction of Elliptic Symbols We now address ourselves to the question of the existence of elliptic symbols in any given class S(M ; Φ, Ψ). This question is equivalent to asking whether there exists a weight M , equivalent to M , which is also a symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ)(= S(M ; Φ, Ψ)). We show that this is in fact the case if the following slow variation conditions are satisﬁed: There exist constants c, C > 0 such that, ⎧ −1 ⎪ ⎨C Φ(y, η) ≤ Φ(x, ξ) ≤ CΦ(y, η), |x − y| ≤ cΦ(y, η) =⇒ C −1 Ψ(y, η) ≤ Ψ(x, ξ) ≤ CΨ(y, η), ⎪ |ξ − η| ≤ cΨ(y, η) ⎩ −1 C M (y, η) ≤ M (x, ξ) ≤ CM (y, η).

(1.3.8)

Indeed, consider a smooth function χ(x, ξ) with 0 ≤ χ(x, ξ) ≤ 1, supported in the box |x| ≤ c, |ξ| ≤ c, and equal to 1 in the box |x| ≤ c/2, |ξ| ≤ c/2, where c is the constant in (1.3.8). Set χy,η (x, ξ) = χ((x − y)/Φ(y, η), (ξ − η)/Ψ(y, η)). Observe that χy,η (x, ξ) is supported in the box |x−y| ≤ cΦ(y, η), |ξ−η| ≤ cΨ(y, η). Hence, if χy,η (x, ξ) = 0, then the conclusions in (1.3.8) hold. Using this fact one deduces that the family of functions χy,η is bounded in S(1; Φ, Ψ), i.e., for every α, β ∈ Nd there exist constants Cαβ such that |∂ξα ∂xβ χy,η (x, ξ)| ≤ Cαβ Ψ(x, ξ)−|α| Φ(x, ξ)−|β| ,

x, ξ, y, η ∈ Rd .

(1.3.9)

Moreover, we have χy,η (x, ξ)dy dη h(x, ξ)d ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

(1.3.10)

To verify the upper bound in (1.3.10), notice that the support of χy,η is contained in the box |x − y| ≤ cCΦ(x, ξ), |ξ − η| ≤ cCΨ(x, ξ). Integrating on this larger set yields χy,η (x, ξ)dy dη ≤ (cC)2d χ L∞ h(x, ξ)d .

1.3. Global Regularity

39

For the lower bound in (1.3.10), we observe that χy,η (x, ξ) = 1 on the set |x − y| ≤ cC −1 Φ(x, ξ)/2, |ξ − η| ≤ cC −1 Ψ(x, ξ)/2. An integration on this set gives the estimate χy,η (x, ξ)dy dη ≥ (cC −1 /2)2d h(x, ξ)d . Now, for any weight M (x, ξ), we set M (x, ξ) = M (y, η)χy,η (x, ξ)h(y, η)−d dy dη.

(1.3.11)

Let us verify that M ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) and M (x, ξ) M (x, ξ), (x, ξ) ∈ R2d . The equivalence M (x, ξ) M (x, ξ),

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

follows at once from the above observation that, on the support of χy,η (x, ξ), M (x, ξ) is equivalent to M (y, η) and h(y, η) is equivalent to h(x, ξ), together with (1.3.10). The estimates for the derivatives of M (x, ξ) follow similarly, because we can diﬀerentiate (1.3.11) under the integral sign, apply (1.3.9) and argue as above. Remark 1.3.10. The above discussion also shows the existence of a continuous (weighted) partition of unity of symbols χy,η (x, ξ) ≥ 0 which belong to a bounded subset of S(1; Φ, Ψ), namely χy,η (x, ξ)h(y, η)−d dy dη = 1, (x, ξ) ∈ R2d . Indeed, the above construction with M (x, ξ) = 1 yields an elliptic symbol M (x, ξ) ∈ S(1; Φ, Ψ). Then the functions χy,η (x, ξ) = χy,η (x, ξ)/M (x, ξ) have the desired property. Example 1.3.11. Set Φ(x, ξ) = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )ρ1 /2 , Ψ(x, ξ) = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )ρ2 /2 and M (x, ξ) = (1+|x|2 +|ξ|2 )s/2 , ρ1 , ρ2 , s ∈ R. Then we see that the slow variation conditions (1.3.8) are satisﬁed for some c, C > 0 if 0 ≤ ρ1 , ρ2 ≤ 1. Indeed, since (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 (1 + |x| + |ξ|), it suﬃces to verify that, for some constants c, C > 0, |x − y| ≤ c(1 + |y| + |η|)ρ1 =⇒ C −1 (1+|y|+|η|) ≤ 1+|x|+|ξ| ≤ C(1+|y|+|η|). |ξ − η| ≤ c(1 + |y| + |η|)ρ2 To this end we observe that by the triangle inequality, |(1 + |x| + |ξ|) − (1 + |y| + |η|)| ≤ |x − y| + |ξ − η| so the desired estimate follows, if ρ1 , ρ2 ≤ 1, for example with c = 1/4, C = 2. In view of (0.1.1) we have actually M ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ).

40

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Example 1.3.12. Let Φ(x, ξ) = xρ1 , Ψ(x, ξ) = ξρ2 , M (x, ξ) = xs1 ξs2 , ρ1 , ρ2 , s1 , s2 ∈ R. Essentially the same arguments as in the previous example show that the slow variation conditions are satisﬁed if 0 ≤ ρ1 ≤ 1, 0 ≤ ρ2 ≤ 1.

1.4 Boundedness on L2 The basic boundedness result we are going to prove is the continuity on L2 (Rd ) of pseudo-diﬀerential operators “of order 0”, i.e., with symbols in S(1) = S(1; Φ, Ψ). Here we assume the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10). A more general result without that assumption will be proved in Theorem 1.7.14 below. Because of Remark 1.2.6 we can limit ourselves to considering the standard (left) quantization. Here we regard a(x, D) as a continuous map S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) (cf. Proposition 1.2.13). The boundedness of a(x, D) on L2 (Rd ) is then easily seen to be equivalent to the estimate

a(x, D)u u , u ∈ S(Rd ), where u = u L2 (Rd ) . Indeed, since S(Rd ) is dense in L2 (Rd ), this estimate tells us that the restriction of a(x, D) to S(Rd ) (which maps S(Rd ) into itself) extends to a bounded operator on L2 (Rd ). This extension coincides with the restriction of a(x, D) to L2 (Rd ) by the uniqueness of the limit in S (Rd ). Theorem 1.4.1. Assume the strong uncertainty principle. Let a ∈ S(1; Φ, Ψ). Then the operator a(x, D) is bounded on L2 (Rd ). Moreover we have the uniform estimate

a(x, D)u a k,S(1;Φ,Ψ) u ,

u ∈ S(Rd ), a ∈ S(1; Φ, Ψ)

(1.4.1)

for some k ∈ N (see (1.1.5)). Proof. The ﬁrst observation is that the boundedness of a(x, D) follows from that of A := a(x, D)∗ a(x, D), where a(x, D)∗ is the formal adjoint of a(x, D). Indeed,

a(x, D)u 2 = (Au, u), for u ∈ S(Rd ). Now, let C > 0 satisfy |a(x, ξ)|2 ≤ C, (x, ξ) ∈ R2d . Then the symbol C + 1 − |a(x, ξ)|2 is elliptic in S(1), and does not vanish anywhere in R2d . Hence, by Lemma 1.3.5 we have b(x, ξ) := (C + 1 − |a(x, ξ)|2 )1/2 ∈ S(1). As a consequence of Proposition 1.2.9 and Theorem 1.2.16, it turns out that b(x, D)∗ b(x, D) = (C + 1)I − A + r(x, D), for some r ∈ S(h). Hence,

a(x, D)u 2 ≤ (C + 1) u 2 + (r(x, D)u, u).

1.5. Sobolev Spaces

41

Therefore it remains to prove that symbols in S(h) give rise to bounded operators on L2 (Rd ). The remark at the beginning of the proof shows that this follows from a similar result for symbols in S(h2 ). By a ﬁnite induction we see that it suﬃces to prove boundedness of operators with symbols in S(hN ), with N large enough. To this end, let N be such that h(x, ξ)N (1 + |x| + |ξ|)−d−1 , which is possible by the strong uncertainty principle. Then symbols in S(hN ) are in L2 (R2d ). By Proposition 1.2.1 the kernels of the corresponding operators belong to L2 (R2d ), so that such operators are clearly bounded (see for details the subsequent Proposition 4.4.19 in Section 4.4 concerning the abstract theory of Hilbert-Schmidt operators). The uniform bound in (1.4.1) follows from this proof and the continuity properties established in Proposition 1.2.9, cf. Theorem 1.2.4, and Theorem 1.2.16. We now exhibit a suﬃcient condition for a pseudo-diﬀerential operator to be compact on L2 (Rd ). Theorem 1.4.2. Assume the strong uncertainty principle. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ), where M tends to 0 at inﬁnity. Then the operator a(x, D) is compact on L2 (Rd ). Proof. According to Proposition 1.1.5 with M0 = M −1 , let an (x, ξ) be a sequence of Schwartz symbols, converging to a(x, ξ) in S(1). It follows from (1.4.1) that the corresponding operators an (x, D) converge to a(x, D) in the space of bounded operators on L2 (Rd ). Hence it suﬃces to prove that every operator with Schwartz symbol is compact on L2 (Rd ). Now, such an operator maps L2 (Rd ) into S(Rd ) continuously, and the embedding S(Rd ) → L2 (Rd ) is compact. Indeed, every bounded sequence in S(Rd ) has a convergent subsequence in S(Rd ) (see for example Treves [190]), hence in L2 (Rd ). Alternatively, operators with symbols in S(R2d ) ⊂ L2 (R2d ) are Hilbert-Schmidt, therefore compact; see Proposition 4.4.19 below.

1.5 Sobolev Spaces We now introduce a Sobolev space associated to a symbol class S(M ; Φ, Ψ), to measure both the local regularity and decay at inﬁnity of functions or temperate distributions in R2d . We assume in this section the strong uncertainty principle. Moreover, we will always work with symbol classes S(M ; Φ, Ψ) for which M is a regular weight, in the following sense. Deﬁnition 1.5.1. A temperate weight M is called regular (with respect to Φ, Ψ) if it is a symbol in its own class, i.e., M ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ). All the weights we will consider in the applications of the subsequent chapters are regular. The assumption that M is a regular weight guarantees the existence of an elliptic symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ), namely M itself. We saw in Section 1.3.2 that, under slow variation assumptions, we can always replace M by an equivalent weight which is regular. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) be an elliptic symbol and set A = a(x, D). According to Theorem 1.3.6, let B = b(x, D), b ∈ S(M −1 ; Φ, Ψ) be a (left) parametrix of A,

42

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

i.e., BA = I + R,

(1.5.1)

where R is a regularizing operator. Deﬁnition 1.5.2. (Sobolev spaces) Let Φ, Ψ be ﬁxed, and let A, R be as above. We deﬁne H(M ) = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : Au ∈ L2 (Rd )}, endowed with the norm

u H(M ) = Au L2 (Rd ) + Ru L2 (Rd ) .

(1.5.2)

The unpleasant term Ru L2 (Rd ) is essential to obtain a norm. Indeed, if Au = 0 and Ru = 0 it follows from (1.5.1) that u = 0 (see however Proposition 1.7.12 below). The space H(M ) could a priori depend on the weights Φ, Ψ, but we will show in Section 1.7.4 below that actually this is not the case. Proposition 1.5.3. We have: (a) Diﬀerent choices of A and R in (1.5.2) produce equivalent norms. (b) The scalar product (u, v)H(M ) = (Au, Au)L2 (Rd ) + (Ru, Ru)L2 (Rd ) deﬁnes a Hilbert space structure on H(M ), and induces a norm equivalent to that in (1.5.2). Proof. (a) Let A be another pseudo-diﬀerential operator with elliptic symbol in S(M ), and B a corresponding parametrix. Hence, B A = I + R , with R regularizing. Of course, it suﬃces to verify that

Au L2 (Rd ) + Ru L2 (Rd ) A u L2 (Rd ) + R u L2 (Rd ) ,

u ∈ S(Rd ).

(1.5.3)

We substitute u = B A u − R u in the left-hand side of (1.5.3). The operator AB has symbol in S(1) and is therefore bounded on L2 (Rd ) by Theorem 1.4.1. Since R and RB are regularizing operators, and therefore bounded on L2 (Rd ), we obtain

Au L2 (Rd ) + Ru L2 (Rd ) A u L2 (Rd ) + R u L2 (Rd ) + AR u L2 (Rd ) . If we replace again u = B A u − R u in the last term of this expression and argue similarly, we obtain the desired estimate. (b) The only non-trivial fact is the completeness of H(M ). To prove it, let un be a Cauchy sequence in H(M ). Then, since L2 (Rd ) is complete, Aun and Run converge in L2 (Rd ). As a consequence, un = BAun − Run converges in S (Rd ) to, say, u ∈ S (Rd ). Since R is regularizing, Ru ∈ S(Rd ) and Run → Ru in S(Rd ), therefore in L2 (Rd ). It remains to prove that Au ∈ L2 (Rd ) and Aun → Au in L2 (Rd ). This follows from the uniqueness of the limit in S (Rd ) by combining the fact that Aun converges in L2 (Rd ) and tends to Au in S (Rd ).

1.5. Sobolev Spaces

43

Here are some basic properties of Sobolev spaces. Proposition 1.5.4. (a) S(Rd ) is a dense subspace of H(M ), and the embedding S(Rd ) → H(M ) is continuous. (b) The embedding H(M ) → S (Rd ) is continuous. Proof. (a) The continuity of the embedding S(Rd ) → H(M ) is clear, because A and R are continuous on S(Rd ) and S(Rd ) → L2 (Rd ) continuously. To prove the density property, let u ∈ H(M ) and let vn be a sequence of Schwartz functions converging to Au in L2 (Rd ). Set un = Bvn − Ru ∈ S(Rd ). Let us verify that un → u in H(M ). Since AB is bounded on L2 (Rd ), we have Aun − Au = ABvn − ARu − Au → ABAu − ARu − Au = 0 in L2 (Rd ). On the other hand, since un → u in S (Rd ), Run → Ru in S(Rd ), and therefore in L2 (Rd ). (b) Let un ∈ H(M ) be a sequence converging to u in H(M ). Then Aun → Au and Run → Ru in L2 (Rd ), and therefore in S (Rd ). Hence, for every φ ∈ S(Rd ), un , φ = Aun ,t Bφ − Run , φ converges to Au,t Bφ − Ru, φ = u, φ, which is the desired conclusion. Here we applied to B the Remark 1.2.14. Proposition 1.5.5. Let M, M1 , M2 , M be regular weights and let P be a pseudodiﬀerential operator with symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ). (a) P deﬁnes a bounded operator from H(M ) into H(M/M ). (b) If moreover M (x, ξ)M2 (x, ξ)/M1 (x, ξ) tends to zero at inﬁnity, P deﬁnes a compact operator H(M1 ) → H(M2 ). Proof. (a) Let A, B, R be as at the beginning of this section, so that the norm in H(M ) is deﬁned in terms of A and R. Let A be a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with elliptic symbol in S(M/M ), with parametrix B having symbol in S(M /M ), and R = B A − I. We use A , R to deﬁne the norm of H(M/M ). Then we consider the expression

A P u L2 (Rd ) + R P u L2 (Rd ) , and we substitute u = BAu − Ru. Since A P B is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in S(1), it is bounded on L2 (Rd ). On the other hand, R P B and R B are regularizing. Hence we obtain

A P u L2 (Rd ) + R P u L2 (Rd ) Au L2 (Rd ) + Ru L2 (Rd ) + A P Ru L2 (Rd ) . Substituting u = BAu − Ru again in the last term of this estimate and arguing similarly one obtains the desired boundedness result. (b) Let Aj , j = 1, 2, be a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with elliptic symbol in S(Mj ), with parametrix Bj having symbol in S(Mj−1 ), and Rj = Bj Aj − I. We use Aj , Rj to deﬁne the norm of H(Mj ). Write P = IP I = (B2 A2 − R2 )P (B1 A1 − R1 ).

44

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

We obtain P = B2 (A2 P B1 )A1 + S, where S is a regularizing operator. By the point (a), A1 : H(M1 ) → L2 (Rd ) and B2 : L2 (Rd ) → H(M2 ) continuously. Since A2 P B1 has a symbol in S(M2 M /M1 ), it is compact on L2 (Rd ) by Theorem 1.4.2. Hence it remains to prove that S is compact from H(M1 ) to H(M2 ). To see this, let un be a bounded sequence in H(M1 ). It follows that Sun is bounded in S(Rd ). Hence, for a suitable subsequence unk , it turns out that Sunk converges in S(Rd ), therefore in H(M2 ). Remark 1.5.6. In Proposition 1.5.5 (a), the norm of P as a bounded operator H(M ) → H(M/M ) can be in fact estimated by a seminorm of its symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ). Corollary 1.5.7. Let M1 , M2 be regular weights. (a) If M2 M1 , then H(M1 ) → H(M2 ) continuously. (b) If M2 (x, ξ)/M1 (x, ξ) tends to 0 at inﬁnity, then the embedding H(M1 ) → H(M2 ) is compact. Proof. This result is a special case of Proposition 1.5.5, with P = I (hence M (x, ξ) = 1). The continuity result in Proposition 1.5.5 (a) allows one to improve the global regularity result in Corollary 1.3.9, and also gives an a priori estimate for pseudodiﬀerential operators with hypoelliptic symbols. ˜ be arbitrary regular weights and let P be a Proposition 1.5.8. Let M , M0 , M, M pseudo-diﬀerential operator with a symbol in Hypo(M , M0 ; Φ, Ψ). We have the a priori estimate

u H(M ) P u H(M/M0 ) + u H(M˜ ) ,

u ∈ S(Rd ).

(1.5.4)

Moreover, if u ∈ S (Rd ) and P u ∈ H(M/M0 ), it turns out u ∈ H(M ). Proof. By Theorem 1.3.6 there exists a pseudo-diﬀerential operator Q with symbol in S(M0−1 ; Φ, Ψ), such that I = QP −R, where R is regularizing. As a consequence of Proposition 1.5.5 (a), B maps continuously H(M/M0 ) into H(M ), whereas ˜ ) into H(M ). This proves the by Proposition 1.5.4 R maps continuously H(M statement. We now come to the representation of the dual of a Sobolev space as a Sobolev space itself. Proposition 1.5.9. Let M be a regular weight. The pairing u, v = u(x)v(x) dx, u, v ∈ S(Rd ), extends to a continuous bilinear map H(M ) × H(M −1 ) → C. Moreover, the dual H(M ) is isomorphic to H(M −1 ) via this extended pairing.

1.6. Fredholm Properties

45

Proof. Let A be a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with an elliptic symbol in S(M ) and B a parametrix, so that R = BA − I is regularizing. Since u = BAu − Ru we have u, v = BAu − Ru, v = Au,tBv − Ru, v, u, v ∈ S(Rd ). In the last term of this expression we can replace v by tAtBv −tRv. We obtain u, v = Au,tBv − ARu,tBv + Ru,tRv. We now apply Cauchy-Schwarz’ inequality in L2 (Rd ) to each of these terms. Since by Propositions 1.2.12 and 1.5.5 (a) the operators A, AR are bounded H(M ) → L2 (Rd ) and tB and tR are bounded H(M −1 ) → L2 (Rd ), we deduce the ﬁrst part of the statement. Let now v ∈ H(M ) . Since S(Rd ) is dense in H(M ) and the embedding d S(R ) → H(M ) is continuous, we have H(M ) → S (Rd ). Hence v ∈ S (Rd ) and we have to prove that v ∈ H(M −1 ), i.e., A v ∈ L2 (Rd ), where A is any pseudo-diﬀerential operator with an elliptic symbol in S(M −1 ). By the Riesz representation theorem and since S(Rd ) is dense in L2 (Rd ), this is equivalent to the estimate |A v, u| ≤ C u L2 (Rd ) , u ∈ S(Rd ). Now, this is true because A v, u = v,tA u, and tA is bounded L2 (Rd ) → H(M ) by Propositions 1.2.12 and 1.5.5 (a). Hence, we veriﬁed that the map H(M −1 ) → H(M ) , v → ·, v is a continuous bijection, and therefore a homeomorphism by the Open Mapping Theorem. Example 1.5.10. Particular cases of special interest are given by the Sobolev spaces H(Φt Ψs ), for s, t ∈ R (when Φ and Ψ are regular weights). It is easy to see that, because of the strong uncertainty principle, H(Φt Ψs ) = S(Rd ), H(Φt Ψs ) = S (Rd ). (1.5.5) s,t∈R

s,t∈R

By further specializing Φ and Ψ, we ﬁnd spaces for which other speciﬁc properties can be proved. This will be detailed in the subsequent chapters.

1.6 Fredholm Properties We discuss in this section some applications of the continuity and compactness results just proved. First we present the needed results from the abstract theory of Fredholm operators in Hilbert spaces.

46

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

1.6.1 Abstract Theory Let H1 , H2 be complex Hilbert spaces and B(H1 , H2 ) be the space of bounded operators H1 → H2 . We deﬁne the kernel and cokernel of an operator T ∈ B(H1 , H2 ) respectively as Ker T = {x ∈ H1 : T x = 0},

Coker T = H2 /T (H1 ).

Since T is bounded, Ker T is a closed subspace of H1 . However, T (H1 ) need not be closed. Observe that if W ⊂ H2 is an (algebraic) supplementary space, i.e., W ∩ T (H1 ) = {0} and W + T (H1 ) = H2 , then W is isomorphic to H2 /T (H1 ) via the map x → x + T (H1 ). Clearly, if T (H1 ) is closed, this holds with W = T (H1 )⊥ . If T ∈ B(H1 , H2 ) we deﬁne the adjoint operator T ∗ ∈ B(H2 , H1 ) by the formula (T ∗ x, y)H1 = (x, T y)H2 , x ∈ H2 , y ∈ H1 , (1.6.1) where (·, ·)Hj , j = 1, 2, denotes the inner product in Hj . It follows from this formula that H2 = T (H1 ) ⊕ Ker T ∗ . Hence, if T (H1 ) is closed, Ker T ∗ is a supplementary space of T (H1 ). We also recall that, for an operator T ∈ B(H1 , H2 ), the transposed t T ∈ B(H2 , H1 ) is deﬁned by the formula t T x, y1 = x, T y2 ,

x ∈ H2 , y ∈ H1 ,

(1.6.2)

where ·, ·j , j = 1, 2, denotes the duality pairing between Hj and Hj . Let us observe that the conjugate-linear map x → (·, x)H2 deﬁnes an isomorphism of Ker T ∗ into Ker t T . Deﬁnition 1.6.1. T ∈ B(H1 , H2 ) is called a Fredholm operator if dim Ker T is ﬁnite and T (H1 ) is closed and has ﬁnite codimension; one then deﬁnes the index of T as the integer number ind T = dim Ker T − dim Coker T .

(1.6.3)

The space of Fredholm operators H1 → H2 is denoted by Fred(H1 , H2 ). Fredholm operators have therefore a small kernel and a large range, so that one could think to them as almost invertible operators. It follows from the above discussion that if T ∈ Fred(H1 , H2 ), then ind T = dim Ker T − dim Ker T ∗ ,

(1.6.4)

ind T = dim Ker T − dim Ker t T.

(1.6.5)

and also Observe that in the above deﬁnition the assumption that T (H1 ) is closed is in fact superﬂuous:

1.6. Fredholm Properties

47

Proposition 1.6.2. Let T ∈ B(H1 , H2 ), with T (H1 ) of ﬁnite codimension. Then T (H1 ) is closed. Proof. T induces a map H1 / Ker T → H2 (still denoted by T in the sequel). Let n be the codimension of T (H1 ) in H2 , and consider a map S : Cn → H2 such that S(Cn ) is a supplementary space for T (H1 ). Then the map T1 : H1 / Ker T ⊕ Cn → H2 ,

(x, y) → T x + Sy

is bijective. By the Open Mapping Theorem it is a homeomorphism, which proves that T (H1 ) = T1 (H1 / Ker T ⊕ {0}) is closed in H2 . A basic but important observation is that, if H1 and H2 have ﬁnite dimension, then every linear operator H1 → H2 is Fredholm and ind T = dim H1 − dim H2 ,

(1.6.6)

as a consequence of elementary linear algebra. In particular, in that case the index is in fact independent of T . Although this is not longer true in the inﬁnite dimensional setting, one still has the following stability result. Theorem 1.6.3. Let T ∈ Fred(H1 , H2 ), and S ∈ B(H1 , H2 ) with S suﬃciently small. Then dim Ker(T + S) ≤ dim Ker T , T + S is Fredholm and ind(T + S) = ind T . Proof. Let V ⊂ H1 be any closed subspace of ﬁnite codimension, such that V ∩ Ker T = {0}. Since T (V ) has ﬁnite codimension in T (H2 ), which has ﬁnite codimension in H2 , we see that T (V ) has ﬁnite codimension in H2 . In particular T (V ) is closed as a consequence of Proposition 1.6.2. Moreover, the operator T induces an operator T˜ : H1 /V → H2 /T (V ), acting therefore between ﬁnite dimensional spaces. A direct inspection shows that the natural map Ker T → H1 → H1 /V deﬁnes an isomorphism Ker T → Ker T˜, whereas the natural map H2 /T (H1 ) → H2 /T (V ) → (H2 /T (V )) /T˜(H1 /V ) deﬁnes an isomorphism Coker T → Coker T˜. Hence ind T = ind T˜ = dim H1 /V − dim H2 /T (V ),

(1.6.7)

where we used (1.6.6). Now, consider the linear map T (V )⊥ ⊕ V → H2 ,

(x, y) → x + (T + S)y.

It depends continuously on S and is a homeomorphism for S = 0, hence also for S small enough. Therefore for such S we see that V ∩ Ker(T + S) = {0} and T (V )⊥ is isomorphic to H2 /(T + S)(V ). In particular, (T + S)(V ) has ﬁnite

48

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

codimension. The inequality dim Ker(T + S) ≤ dim Ker T also follows by this argument by choosing V = (Ker T )⊥ , for then the orthogonal projection of Ker(T + S) on Ker T is one-to-one. Hence T + S is Fredholm too. Finally, to prove the equality of the indices, observe that (1.6.7) applied to T + S in place of T yields ind(T + S) = dim H1 /V − dim H2 /(T + S)(V ) = dim H1 /V − dim T (V )⊥ = ind T,

which concludes the proof.

Corollary 1.6.4. Fred(B1 , B2 ) is open in B(H1 , H2 ), dim Ker T is upper semicontinuous on Fred(B1 , B2 ) and ind: Fred(H1 , H2 ) → Z is constant on the connected components of Fred(H1 , H2 ). Corollary 1.6.5. If T1 ∈ Fred(H1 , H2 ) and T2 ∈ Fred(H2 , H3 ), then we have T2 T1 ∈ Fred(H1 , H3 ) and the following “logarithmic law” holds: ind T2 T1 = ind T1 + ind T2 . Proof. Since T1 maps Ker T2 T1 in Ker T2 with kernel Ker T1 , we have dim Ker T2 T1 ≤ dim Ker T1 + dim Ker T2 . Similarly, dim Coker T2 T1 ≤ dim Coker T1 + dim Coker T2 , so that T2 T1 ∈ Fred(H1 , H3 ). If I2 is the identity operator in B2 , it follows from what we have just proved that, in block matrix notation,

I2 cos t I2 sin t I2 0 T1 0 0 T2 −I2 sin t I2 cos t 0 I2 is for every t a Fredholm operator from H1 ⊕ H2 to H2 ⊕ H3 . For t = 0 it is the direct sum of the operators T1 and T2 whereas for t = −π/2 it is the operator (f1 , f2 ) → (−f2 , T2 T1 f1 ). The corresponding indices are ind T1 + ind T2 and ind T2 T1 respectively. Hence the result follows from the stability of the index in Theorem 1.6.3. Theorem 1.6.6. If T ∈ Fred(H1 , H2 ) and K ∈ B(H1 , H2 ) is compact, then T +K ∈ Fred(H1 , H2 ) and ind(T + K) = ind T . Proof. Once we prove that T + K is Fredholm, the equality of the indices follows by applying the stability result in Theorem 1.6.3 to the homotopy of operators T + tK, 0 ≤ t ≤ 1.

1.6. Fredholm Properties

49

First we verify that T + K is Fredholm when T is invertible. To prove that Ker(T + K) has ﬁnite dimension, we show that every bounded sequence xn in Ker(T + K) has a convergent subsequence, i.e., that the closed unit ball in Ker(T + K) is compact. In fact, T xn = −Kxn is then convergent, for K is compact. Since T is invertible, the claim follows. To prove that Coker(T + K) has ﬁnite dimension, we use the splitting H2 = (T + K)(H1 ) ⊕ Ker(T + K)∗ . Since the above argument applied to T ∗ + K ∗ shows that Ker(T + K)∗ has ﬁnite dimension, it suﬃces to prove that (T + K)(H1 ) is closed, i.e.,

x ≤ C (T + K)x ,

x ∈ Ker(T + K)⊥ ,

for some constant C > 0. This is seen by contradiction: if some sequence xn ∈ Ker(T + K)⊥ satisﬁes xn = 1, (T + K)xn → 0, then essentially the same argument as above shows that xn must be convergent, say to y ∈ Ker(T + K)⊥ ,

y = 1, because Ker(T + K)⊥ is closed. On the other hand, by continuity one would obtain (T + K)y = 0, which is a contradiction. Consider now the general case when T is just Fredholm. We then split H1 = (Ker T )⊥ ⊕ Ker T , H2 = T (H1 ) ⊕ T (H1 )⊥ . Correspondingly the operator T + K is represented as

T11 + K11 K12 , T +K = K21 K22 where T11 : (Ker T )⊥ → T (H1 ) is invertible, and K11 , K12 , K21 , K22 are compact. Hence, from the ﬁrst part of the present proof we get that T11 + K11 is Fredholm. Therefore Ker(T + K) ⊂ {x ⊕ y ∈ (Ker T )⊥ ⊕ Ker T, (T11 + K11 )x = −K12 y} has ﬁnite dimension, since K12 y, with y ∈ Ker T , varies in a ﬁnite dimensional space; moreover (T + K)(H1 ) ⊃ {(T11 + K11 )x + K21 x, x ∈ (Ker T )⊥ } has ﬁnite codimension, because K21 takes values in the ﬁnite dimensional space T (H1 )⊥ . When H1 = H2 , Theorem 1.6.6 applies, in particular, to operators of the form I + K with K compact, which have index 0. The conclusion reads as the familiar Fredholm alternative: there exist ﬁnite dimensional subspaces W1 , W2 ⊂ H1 , having the same dimension, such that the equation x + Kx = y is solvable precisely when y⊥W2 and the solution is then unique modulo W1 . This generalizes what happens for an n × n linear system.

50

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Corollary 1.6.7. If T ∈ B(H1 , H2 ) and Sj ∈ B(H2 , H1 ), j = 1, 2, satisfy T S2 = I2 + K2 , S1 T = I1 + K1 with Kj compact, then T, S1 , S2 are Fredholm operators and ind T = − ind Sj , j = 1, 2. Proof. Since dim Ker T ≤ dim Ker(I1 + K1 ), and dim Coker T ≤ dim Coker(I2 + K2 ), we get T ∈ Fred(H1 , H2 ) by Theorem 1.6.6. Moreover S1 T S2 = S1 + S1 K2 = S2 + K1 S2 , so that S2 − S1 is compact. Hence S2 T − I1 and T S1 − I2 are compact as well, and therefore S1 , S2 ∈ Fred(H2 , H1 ) by the ﬁrst part of the proof. Finally ind T + ind Sj = ind(Ij + Kj ) = 0 by Corollary 1.6.5 and Theorem 1.6.6. Remark 1.6.8. The deﬁnition of Fredholm operator also applies to operators acting on Banach spaces, and the results in this section extend to that more general framework. Here we considered only the case of Hilbert spaces for the sake of simplicity.

1.6.2 Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators We come now to the case of pseudo-diﬀerential operators with symbols in the classes S(M ; Φ, Ψ), acting on the Sobolev spaces H(M ) introduced in the previous section. We continue to assume the strong uncertainty principle and we suppose that the implied weights M, M are regular, according to Deﬁnition 1.5.1 (cf. also Section 1.3.2). Given a pseudo-diﬀerential operator A with symbol in S(M ), denote by A|H(M ) the restriction of A : S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) to H(M ). We know from Proposition 1.5.5 (a) that A|H(M ) : H(M ) → H(M/M ) is bounded. Assume in addition that A is elliptic, and let B be a parametrix. Then B has symbol in S(M −1 ), so that it deﬁnes a bounded operator H(M/M ) → H(M ). Moreover the operators BA − I and AB − I have symbols in S(h) and therefore they deﬁne compact operators on H(M ) and H(M/M ), respectively, by Proposition 1.5.5 (b). We can then apply Corollary 1.6.7 with H1 = H(M ), H2 = H(M/M ) and we deduce that A|H(M ) ∈ Fred(H1 , H2 ). An interesting fact is that the index of A|H(M ) is actually independent of the weight M . Indeed, the global regularity result in Corollary 1.3.9 shows that the

1.7. Anti-Wick Quantization

51

kernel Ker A|H(M ) consists of Schwartz functions, so that it does not depend on M. Similarly, we claim that dim Coker A|H(M ) is independent of M . To see this, let us observe that by the discussion before Deﬁnition 1.6.1, Coker A|H(M ) is isomorphic to Ker t A|H(M ) . According to (1.6.2), the transposed t A|H(M ) : H(M/M ) → H(M ) is deﬁned by t A|H(M ) u, v = u, Av,

u ∈ H(M/M ) , v ∈ H(M ),

where we may read ·, · as the usual duality in Schwartz spaces. In fact, without invoking Proposition 1.5.9 explicitly, observe that, since S(Rd ) is a dense subspace of H(M/M ), we have H(M/M ) → S (Rd ). Hence the above operator coind d ) cides with the restriction to H(M/M ) of the transposedtA : S (R ) → S (R t t (see Remarks 1.2.11 and 1.2.14). We deduce that Ker A|H(M ) = Ker A ∩ H(M/M ) . Since tA is elliptic as well, Ker tA is in fact a subspace of S(Rd ), so that Ker t A|H(M ) = Ker tA is independent of M . This gives the claim. Notice that, since A∗ u = tAu, Ker tA is also isomorphic to the kernel of the formal adjoint A∗ : S (Rd ) → S (Rd ). Finally we observe that, by Propositions 1.5.5 (b) and Theorem 1.6.6, the index of A|H(M ) is invariant by perturbations with operators having symbols in S(M M0 ), where M0 is any regular weight which tends to 0 at inﬁnity. We can summarize this discussion in the following theorem. Theorem 1.6.9. Let M, M be regular weights, and let A be a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with an elliptic symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ). (i) A|H(M ) ∈ Fred(H(M ), H(M/M )); (ii) ind A|H(M ) = dim KerA − dim KerA∗ , ind A|H(M ) = dim KerA − dim Ker tA, where A∗ is the formal adjoint and tA the transposed operator, so that the index is independent of M ; (iii) If B is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in S(M M0 ; Φ, Ψ), where M0 is any regular weight which tends to 0 at inﬁnity, then A|H(M ) + B|H(M ) ∈ Fred(H(M ), H(M/M )), and ind A|H(M ) + B|H(M ) = ind A|H(M ) .

1.7 Anti-Wick Quantization We now introduce yet another quantization a → Aa , which has the advantage to preserve positivity. Then we compare it with the Weyl one.

52

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

1.7.1 Short-Time Fourier Transform and Anti-Wick Operators Let

2

1

G0 (x) = π −d/4 e− 2 |x| ,

and

2

1

Gy,η (x) = π −d/4 eixη e− 2 |x−y| ,

(1.7.1)

where (y, η) are parameters in R2d . Observe that

G0 2L2 (Rd ) = Gy,η 2L2 (Rd ) = π −d/2

2

e−|x| dx = 1.

Let moreover Ty G0 (t) = G0 (t − y), t, y ∈ Rd . Deﬁnition 1.7.1. (Short-time Fourier transform) For u ∈ S (Rd ), we deﬁne the short-time Fourier transform V u of u as the temperate distribution in R2d given by V u(y, η) = (u, Gy,η ) = (2π)d/2 Ft→η (u(t)(Ty G0 )(t)), (1.7.2) where (·, ·) denotes the sesqui-linear form on S (Rd ) × S(Rd ) which agrees with the inner product in L2 (Rd ) on Schwartz functions. Proposition 1.7.2. The short-time Fourier transform acts continuously S (Rd ) → S (R2d ), S(Rd ) → S(R2d ) and L2 (Rd ) → L2 (R2d ). Moreover,

V u L2 (R2d ) = (2π)d/2 u L2 (Rd ) ,

u ∈ L2 (Rd ).

(1.7.3)

Proof. The ﬁrst part of the statement follows by observing that the map u(t) → u(t)Ty G0 (t) acts continuously S (Rd ) → S (R2d ), S(Rd ) → S(R2d ) and L2 (Rd ) → L2 (R2d ), whereas the partial Fourier transform is a continuous map on S (R2d ), on S(R2d ) and on L2 (R2d ). The equality (1.7.3) is a consequence of Parseval’s formula and the fact that G0 L2 (Rd ) = 1. The adjoint map S(R2d ) → S(Rd ), −1 (V ∗ F )(t) = (2π)d/2 Fη→t F (y, η)Ty G0 (t) dy,

F ∈ S(R2d ),

(1.7.4)

extends to a well deﬁned continuous map S (R2d ) → S (Rd ), and L2 (R2d ) → L2 (Rd ). Moreover,

V ∗ F L2 (Rd ) = (2π)d/2 F L2 (R2d ) ,

F ∈ L2 (R2d ).

(1.7.5)

Also, it follows at once from the expressions in (1.7.2) and (1.7.4) that V ∗ V = (2π)d I.

(1.7.6)

1.7. Anti-Wick Quantization

53

Deﬁnition 1.7.3. (Anti-Wick operator) Let a ∈ S (R2d ). We deﬁne the Anti-Wick operator with symbol a as the map S(Rd ) → S (Rd ) given by Aa u = (2π)−d V ∗ (aV u) ,

u ∈ S(Rd ).

(1.7.7)

The factor (2π)−d is introduced for the symbol a = 1 to give rise to the identity operator, due to (1.7.6). Formula (1.7.7) is equivalent to saying Aa u, v = (2π)−d a, V u V v,

u, v ∈ S(Rd ).

(1.7.8)

As an immediate consequence of this deﬁnition we have the following results. Proposition 1.7.4. Let an ∈ S (R2d ) be a sequence convergent to a in S (R2d ). Then Aan u → Aa u in S (Rd ), for every u ∈ S(Rd ). Proposition 1.7.5. Let a ∈ S (R2d ) be real-valued. Then Aa is formally self-adjoint. Since V u is a Schwartz function if u is, we deduce that if a is, say, a locally integrable function with polynomial growth (in particular, a symbol in S(M ; Φ, Ψ)), then by (1.7.8) and Fubini’s theorem we can write the action of the operator Aa as Aa u(x) = a(y, η)(u, Gy,η )Gy,η (x) dy ¯ dη ¯ ¯ dη, ¯ u ∈ S(Rd ), (1.7.9) = a(y, η) (Py,η u) (x) dy where Py,η is the rank-one orthogonal projection on the line spanned by Gy,η , i.e.,

Gy,η (t)u(t) dt Gy,η (x). (1.7.10) Py,η u(x) = Also, observe that if a is smooth and has polynomial growth, together with its derivatives, then it is a multiplier for S(R2d ), and Aa maps S(Rd ) into itself continuously. Proposition 1.7.6. Let a(x, ξ) be a locally integrable function with polynomial growth. If a(x, ξ) ≥ 0 for almost every (x, ξ) ∈ R2d , then Aa ≥ 0, that is (Aa u, u)L2 (Rd ) ≥ 0,

for all u ∈ S(Rd ).

(1.7.11)

Moreover if a(x, ξ) > 0 for almost every (x, ξ) ∈ R2d , then Aa > 0, that is (Aa u, u)L2 (Rd ) > 0 for u = 0. Proof. We have, from (1.7.8), (Aa u, u) =

a(y, η)|(u, Gy,η )|2 dy ¯ dη. ¯

54

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Under the assumption a(y, η) ≥ 0 we conclude (Aa u, u) ≥ 0. If a(y, η) > 0 for almost every (y, η) ∈ R2d , then (Aa u, u) = 0 would imply (u, Gy,η ) = 0 for almost every (y, η) ∈ R2d . Since |x−y|2 − d4 d/2 (u, Gy,η ) = π (2π) Fx→η u(x)e− 2 (η),

this gives u = 0. ∞

2d

Proposition 1.7.7. Let a ∈ L (R ). Then Aa extends to a bounded operator on L2 (Rd ), with

Aa B(L2 (Rd )) ≤ a L∞ (R2d ) . Proof. The result is clear from the deﬁnition in (1.7.7), taking into account (1.7.3) and (1.7.5). Alternatively, one can use (1.7.3), (1.7.8) and duality.

1.7.2 Relationship with the Weyl Quantization Anti-Wick operators, as continuous operators S(Rd ) → S (Rd ), have a distribution kernel in S (R2d ), and therefore can be regarded as pseudo-diﬀerential operators with distribution symbols. We now study in detail the relationship between the Anti-Wick symbol and the Weyl one. Observe, ﬁrst of all, that the integral kernel of Py,η in (1.7.10) is the Schwartz function (1.7.12) Ky,η (x, t) = Gy,η (x)Gy,η (t). As a consequence, Py,η can be regarded as a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with Schwartz symbol. For example, considering the Weyl quantization, we can write

x+t Py,η u(x) = ei(x−t)ξ σy,η , ξ u(t) dt ¯ dξ, ¯ (1.7.13) 2 where the Weyl symbol σy,η of Py,η can be computed from the above expression for its kernel by means of (1.2.4) with τ = 1/2. Namely,

2 2 1 1 σy,η (x, ξ) = (2π)d/2 Ft→ξ Ky,η x + t, x − t = 2d e−(|x−y| +|ξ−η| ) . (1.7.14) 2 2 We have therefore the following basic result. Proposition 1.7.8. The orthogonal projection operator Py,η on the unitary vector (1.7.1) can be written as a formally self-adjoint pseudo-diﬀerential operator, with real Weyl symbol σy,η ∈ S(R2d ) given by (1.7.14). Consider now a ∈ S(R2d ). Inserting (1.7.13) into (1.7.9) we obtain, for u ∈ S(R ),

x+t Aa u(x) = ei(x−t)ξ b , ξ u(t) dt ¯ dξ, ¯ (1.7.15) 2 d

1.7. Anti-Wick Quantization

55

with

d

b(x, ξ) = 2

2

a(y, η)e−(|x−y|

+|ξ−η|2 )

dy ¯ dη ¯

= (2π)−d (a ∗ σ0,0 )(x, ξ).

(1.7.16)

Proposition 1.7.9. Let a ∈ S (R2d ). Then Aa = bw , where b ∈ S (R2d ) is given in (1.7.16). Proof. The result was proved above for Schwartz symbols. The general case follows by a limiting argument, taking into account Propositions 1.7.4 and 1.2.2 and the fact that the map a → a ∗ σ0,0 is continuous on S (R2d ). We now take symbols a in the classes S(M ; Φ, Ψ). We consider, for simplicity, only the case in which Φ ≡ Ψ. This implies Ψ ≡ h−1/2 (h being the Planck function in (1.1.8)). Theorem 1.7.10. Let a ∈ S(M ; Ψ, Ψ). Then Aa is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in the same class. More precisely, its Weyl symbol b(x, ξ) deﬁned in (1.7.16) belongs to S(M ; Ψ, Ψ) and has asymptotic expansion cαβ b(x, ξ) ∼ ∂ α ∂ β a(x, ξ), (1.7.17) α!β! ξ x α,β

in the sense that, for every N ≥ 1, cαβ ∂ α ∂ β a ∈ S(M hN/2 ; Ψ, Ψ), RN = b − α!β! ξ x

(1.7.18)

|α+β|

where cαβ = 2d

η α y β e−(|y|

2

+|η|2 )

dy ¯ dη. ¯

(1.7.19)

In particular c00 = 1 and cαβ = 0 for odd |α + β|. Proof. It will be suﬃcient to prove that (1.7.18) holds true for b(x, ξ) deﬁned as in (1.7.16). We may Taylor expand a(y, η) =

|α+β|
1 α β ∂ ∂ a(x, ξ)(η − ξ)α (y − x)β + rN (x, y, ξ, η), α!β! ξ x

(1.7.20)

with

rN (x, y, ξ, η) = N

|α+β|=N

×

0

1

1 (η − ξ)α (y − x)β α!β!

(1 − t)N −1 ∂ξα ∂xβ a (x + t(y − x), ξ + t(η − ξ)) dt. (1.7.21)

56

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Inserting this in the expression 2 2 ¯ dη, ¯ b(x, ξ) = 2d a(y, η)e−(|x−y| +|ξ−η| ) dy we obtain the equality in (1.7.18) with cαβ given by (1.7.19) and 2 2 d ¯ dη. ¯ rN (x, y, ξ, η)e−(|x−y| +|ξ−η| ) dy RN (x, ξ) = 2

(1.7.22)

To prove that RN ∈ S(M hN/2 ; Ψ, Ψ) we estimate ∂ξγ ∂xδ RN ; in view of (1.7.21) and (1.7.22) it will be suﬃcient to obtain bounds independent of t for the terms 2 2 I(t, x, ξ) := ηα y β e−(|y| +|η| ) ∂ξα+γ ∂xβ+δ a (x + ty, ξ + tη) dy ¯ dη, ¯ (1.7.23) where |α + β| = N . Appealing once again to the temperance property of M and Ψ we have, for some s ≥ 0, α+γ β+δ ∂ξ ∂x a (x + ty, ξ + tη) M (x + ty, ξ + tη)Ψ(x + ty, ξ + tη)−|α+β+γ+δ| M (x,ξ)Ψ(x, ξ)−|α+β+γ+δ| (1 + |y| + |η|)s(1+|α+β+γ+δ|) , which gives for (1.7.23) the expected estimates |I(t, x, ξ)| M (x, ξ)h(x, ξ)N/2 Ψ(x, ξ)−|γ+δ| , (recall that here Ψ ≡ h−1/2 ). The theorem is therefore proved.

Not every pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in S(M ; Ψ, Ψ) admits an Anti-Wick symbol a in the same class; observe in fact that the Weyl symbol b(x, ξ) in (1.7.16) must be an analytic function of (x, ξ) ∈ R2d . We have however a converse of Theorem 1.7.10 modulo regularizing operators. Proposition 1.7.11. Let a be a symbol in S(M ; Ψ, Ψ). Then there exists a symbol s ∈ S(M h; Ψ, Ψ) such that Aa = aw + sw . Assume the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10) is satisﬁed. Then for every b ∈ S(M ; Ψ, Ψ) there exist a ∈ S(M ; Ψ, Ψ) and r ∈ S(R2d ) such that bw = Aa +rw . Proof. The ﬁrst part of the statement follows at once from Theorem 1.7.10, with N = 2, for c0,0 = 1 and cα,β = 0 if |α + β| = 1. To prove the second part, we observe that, by the result just proved, bw − Ab is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with Weyl symbol b(1) ∈ S(M h; Ψ, Ψ). The same arguments applied to b(1) (x, ξ) in place of b(x, ξ) shows that bw − Ab+b(1) is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in S(M h2 ; Ψ, Ψ). By induction one shows the existence of a sequence of symbols b(n) ∈ S(M hn ; Ψ, Ψ), b(0) = b, such that, N after setting c(N ) = n=0 b(n) , the diﬀerence bw − Ac(N −1) is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in S(M hN ; Ψ, Ψ). According to Proposition 1.1.6 there

1.7. Anti-Wick Quantization

57

∞ (n) exists a symbol a ∼ in S(M ; Ψ, Ψ). We obtain that bw − Aa is a n=0 b pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in S(M hN ; Ψ, Ψ) for every N , i.e., in S(R2d ) by (1.1.11). This concludes the proof. For polynomial symbols there is in fact an exact converse of Theorem 1.7.10. We will discuss it in Section 1.8. We conclude this section with an application to the theory of Sobolev spaces. More precisely, one can exploit the injectivity of an Anti-Wick operator with strictly positive symbol (cf. Proposition 1.7.6) to deﬁne an equivalent norm in the Sobolev spaces S(M ; Ψ, Ψ), hence avoiding the use of a parametrix. Proposition 1.7.12. Assume the strong uncertainty principle. Let a be an elliptic symbol in S(M ; Ψ, Ψ), with a(x, ξ) > 0 for (x, ξ) ∈ R2d . Then Aa deﬁnes an isomorphism of S(Rd ) and of S (Rd ), and also of H(M ) into L2 (Rd ). Its inverse −1 A−1 ; Ψ, Ψ). a is still a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with Weyl symbol in S(M As a consequence, an equivalent norm in H(M ) is given by Aa u L2 (Rd ) , u ∈ H(M ). Proof. We start by proving that Aa is bijective and continuous as a map on S(Rd ), on S (Rd ), and H(M ) → L2 (Rd ). By Theorem 1.7.10, Aa is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with Weyl symbol b ∈ S(M ; Ψ, Ψ) so that the continuity follows from Propositions 1.2.7, 1.2.13 and 1.5.5 (a). Since b − a ∈ S(M h; Ψ, Ψ), and h(x, ξ) tends to zero at inﬁnity by the strong uncertainty principle, we see that b is elliptic as well. As a consequence, Corollary 1.3.9 tells us that the kernel of Aa : S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) consists of Schwartz functions and therefore reduces to the trivial space by Proposition 1.7.6. This proves the injectivity of the map on all the above spaces. Now, since Aa is formally self-adjoint, by Theorem 1.6.9 its index is 0 as a map H(M ) → L2 (Rd ), so that this map is also surjective. Again by Corollary 1.3.9, Aa is surjective as a map on S(Rd ) as well. By the Open Mapping Theorem it follows that Aa deﬁnes an isomorphism of S(Rd ) and also of H(M ) into L2 (Rd ). Let us now prove that the same is true as a map on S (Rd ) and that the inverse map is pseudo-diﬀerential. To this end, let B denote a parametrix of Aa , with the inverse of Aa , as an operator on Weyl symbol in S(M −1 ; Ψ, Ψ), and A−1 a −1 d S(Rd ). We have A−1 a = Aa (Aa B − R) = B − R , as operators on S(R ), with −1 R, R regularizing. It follows that Aa is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with Weyl symbol in S(M −1 ; Ψ, Ψ) and therefore extends to a continuous operator on S (Rd ). −1 d d The identities A−1 a Aa = I, Aa Aa = I, valid on S(R ), extend therefore to S (R ). This concludes the proof. Remark 1.7.13. The proof of Proposition 1.7.12 shows that, if a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) is real and elliptic, and aw is injective on S(Rd ) then aw is an isomorphism of S(Rd ) and of S (Rd ) and its inverse is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator with (real elliptic) Weyl symbol in S(M −1 ; Φ, Ψ).

58

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

1.7.3 Applications to Boundedness on L2 and Almost Positivity of Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators Here we prove the boundedness on L2 (Rd ) of pseudo-diﬀerential operators with symbols in S(1; 1, 1) (M (x, ξ) = Φ(x, ξ) = Ψ(x, ξ) ≡ 1), i.e., satisfying for every k∈N

a k,S(1;1,1) = sup sup |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| < ∞. (1.7.24) |α|+|β|≤k (x,ξ)∈R2d

Since the weights Φ and Ψ we are considering satisfy (1.1.1), every class S(1; Φ, Ψ) is contained in S(1; 1, 1). Hence we obtain, in particular, the boundedness of pseudo-diﬀerential operators with symbols in S(1; Φ, Ψ), without assuming the strong uncertainty principle. The idea of the proof is to use the family of functions Gy,η in (1.7.1) to reach an almost diagonalization of such pseudo-diﬀerential operators. Theorem 1.7.14. Let a be a smooth function in R2d satisfying the estimates in (1.7.24). The corresponding operator a(x, D) is bounded on L2 (Rd ), with the uniform estimate

a(x, D) B(L2 (Rd )) a N,S(1;1,1) ,

a ∈ S(1; 1, 1),

(1.7.25)

where N depends only on the dimension d. Proof. It suﬃces to prove (1.7.25) for Schwartz symbols, since the general case follows by a limiting argument which uses Proposition 1.1.5. Hence, let a ∈ S(R2d ). In view of (1.7.6), we write a(x, D) = (2π)−4d V ∗ V a(x, D)V ∗ V, where V is the short time Fourier transform in (1.7.2) and V ∗ its adjoint in (1.7.4). Because of (1.7.3) and (1.7.5), it suﬃces to prove that

V a(x, D)V ∗ F L2 (R2d ) a N,S(1;1,1) F L2 (R2d ) ,

F ∈ S(R2d ).

(1.7.26)

To this end we look at the integral kernel K(y , η ; y, η) in R4d of the operator V a(x, D)V ∗ . Since for Schwartz functions F we have ∗ (V F )(x) = F (y, η)Gy,η (x) dy dη, it turns out that (V a(x, D)V ∗ F ) (y , η ) = so that K(y , η ; y, η) =

F (y, η) (a(x, D)Gy,η ) (x)Gy ,η (x) dx dy dη,

eixξ a(x, ξ)G ¯ y,η (ξ)Gy ,η (x) dx dξ.

1.7. Anti-Wick Quantization

59

An explicit computation shows that −iy(ξ−η) G0 (ξ − η). G y,η (ξ) = e

Hence, by a linear change of variables we obtain |K(y , η ; y, η)| = eixξ−iyξ−ixη a(x, ξ)G0 (ξ − η)G0 (x − y ) dx dξ ¯ ¯ . = eix(η−η )+iξ(y −y) eixξ a(x + y , ξ + η)G0 (ξ)G0 (x) dx dξ (1.7.27) From this expression one easily deduces the estimate |K(y , η ; y, η)| a 4N,S(1;1,1) y − y −2N η − η −2N

(1.7.28)

for every N ∈ N. Indeed, we have

y − y 2N η − η 2N eix(η−η )+iξ(y −y) = (1 − Δx )N (1 − Δξ )N eix(η−η )+iξ(y −y) . Hence, (1.7.28) follows by repeated integrations by parts in (1.7.27), taking into account that, for every N ∈ N, |(1 − Δx )N (1 − Δξ )N {eixξ a(x + y , ξ + η)G0 (ξ)G0 (x)}|

a 4N,S(1;1,1) x−N ξ−N , due to Leibniz’ formula, (1.7.24) and the fact that G0 ∈ S(Rd ). Now, if 2N > d in (1.7.28), we see that the kernel K(y , η ; y, η) is dominated by a convolution kernel in L1 (R2d ). Therefore (1.7.26) follows by Young’s inequality. We now come to an application to the almost positivity of pseudo-diﬀerential operators. Contrary to the result in Proposition 1.7.6 for the Anti-Wick quantization, pseudo-diﬀerential operators with positive Weyl symbol are not positive in general. Consider for example in dimension d = 1 the symbol a(x, ξ) = x2 ξ 2 ≥ 0. The operator A with Weyl symbol a can be written as A= and therefore

1 1 (xDx + Dx x)2 − , 4 4

1 1

(xDx + Dx x)u 2L2 − u 2L2 , 4 4 where the right-hand side is negative for suitable u ∈ S(R). We have however the following lower bound, “with gain of one derivative”, for pseudo-diﬀerential operators with positive Weyl symbol. It represents one of the basic applications of the Anti-Wick theory. (Au, u)L2 =

60

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Theorem 1.7.15. (Sharp Gårding inequality) Let a ∈ S(h−1 ; Ψ, Ψ), a(x, ξ) ≥ 0, (x, ξ) ∈ R2d . There exists a constant C > 0 such that (aw u, u)L2 (Rd ) ≥ −C u L2 (Rd ) ,

u ∈ S(Rd ).

(1.7.29)

Proof. By Proposition 1.7.11 we have aw = Aa + sw , where s ∈ S(1; Ψ, Ψ). Since Aa satisﬁes (1.7.11) and sw is bounded on L2 (Rd ) by Theorem 1.7.14, the desired result follows. Much more reﬁned techniques allow one to prove (1.7.29) for symbols in S(h−2 ; Φ, Ψ) (under additional assumptions on Φ and Ψ), which is the so-called Feﬀerman-Phong inequality.

1.7.4 Sobolev Spaces Revisited As another application of Anti-Wick techniques we now show, as promised in Section 1.5, that the Sobolev spaces H(M ) introduced there are in fact independent of the choice of the weights Φ and Ψ. Let M be a temperate weight, cf. (1.1.2). Let L2M (R2d ) be the weighted Lebesgue space of measurable functions F in R2d such that M F ∈ L2 (R2d ), with the norm F L2M (R2d ) = M F L2 (R2d ) . ˜ We deﬁne the space H(M ) as the completion of the Schwartz class S(Rd ) with respect to the norm

u H(M ˜ ) = V u L2M (R2d ) =

2

2

M (y, η) |V u(y, η)| dy dη

1/2 ,

u ∈ S(Rd ),

where V u is the short-time Fourier transform of u in (1.7.2). Notice that the above norm is well deﬁned for u ∈ S(Rd ), because V u ∈ 2d S(R ) and M has polynomial growth. In fact, we have a continuous inclusion ˜ ˜ S(Rd ) → H(M ). Moreover, for M (x, ξ) ≡ 1 we get H(1) = L2 (Rd ) by (1.7.3). ˜ Let us show that the space H(M ) in Deﬁnition 1.5.2 coincides with H(M ), and is therefore independent of Φ and Ψ. To this end, we need the following continuity result. Theorem 1.7.16. Let M, M be temperate weights and a ∈ S(M ; 1, 1) (Φ(x, ξ) = ˜ ˜ Ψ(x, ξ) = 1). Then a(x, D) extends to a bounded operator H(M ) → H(M/M ). Proof. We argue as in the proof of Theorem 1.7.14. Namely, using (1.7.6) we write a(x, D) = (2π)−4d V ∗ V a(x, D)V ∗ V on S(Rd ). Observe that the map (2π)−d/2 V ˜ clearly extends to an isometry H(M ) → V (S(Rd )) ⊂ L2M (R2d ) and similarly ˜ (2π)−d/2 V ∗ extends to an isometry V (S(Rd )) ⊂ L2M/M (R2d ) → H(M/M ). Hence ∗ we need only prove that V a(x, D)V extends to a bounded map L2M (R2d ) → L2M/M (R2d ). We know that the integral kernel K(y , η ; y, η) of this map has the expression in (1.7.27).

1.7. Anti-Wick Quantization

61

Repeated integrations by parts in (1.7.27) (as in the proof of Theorem 1.7.14), combined with the symbol estimates for a(x, ξ) and the temperance M (x + y , ξ + η) M (y , η)(1 + |x| + |ξ|)s , show that for every N , |K(y , η ; y, η)| M (y , η)y − y −N η − η −N . As a consequence, for F ∈ S(R2d ), we get M (y , η ) | (V a(x, D)V ∗ F ) (y , η )| M (y , η ) M (y , η ) M (y , η) y − y −N η − η −N M (y, η)|F (y, η)| dy dη. M (y , η ) M (y, η) Again by temperance we have M (y , η ) (1 + |y − y | + |η − η |)s , M (y, η)

M (y , η) (1 + |η − η |)s , M (y , η )

so that we get, for every N , M (y , η ) | (V a(x, D)V ∗ F ) (y , η )| M (y , η ) y − y −N η − η −N M (y, η)|F (y, η)| dy dη. An application of Young’s inequality then gives the estimate

V a(x, D)V ∗ F L2

M/M

(R2d )

F L2M (R2d ) ,

F ∈ S(R2d ),

which concludes the proof.

Corollary 1.7.17. Assume further that the temperate weight M is regular, in the sense of Deﬁnition 1.5.1. The Sobolev space H(M ) in Deﬁnition 1.5.2 coincides, ˜ for every choice of the weights Φ, Ψ, with the above space H(M ), with equivalent norms. Proof. Let a ∈ S(M ; Φ, Ψ) be an elliptic symbol and set A = a(x, D). Let B = b(x, D), b ∈ S(M −1 ; Φ, Ψ) be a (left) parametrix of A, so that BA = I + R, ˜ ˜ with R regularizing. By Theorem 1.7.16, A and R act H(M ) → H(1) = L2 (Rd ) continuously. Hence we have the estimate

Au L2 (Rd ) + Ru L2 (Rd ) u H(M ˜ ), ˜ which is H(M ) → H(M ). ˜ ˜ Similarly, by Theorem 1.7.16, B acts L2 (Rd ) = H(1) → H(M ) continuously, so that using u = BAu + Ru we get

u H(M ˜ ˜ ) Au L2 (Rd ) + Ru H(M ).

62

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

˜ Clearly Au L2 (Rd ) u H(M ) . On the other hand, since S(Rd ) → H(M ) and d

u

, and the opposite R is continuous H(M ) → S(R ), we get Ru H(M ˜ H(M ) ) ˜ inclusion H(M ) → H(M ) is therefore proved.

1.8 Quantizations of Polynomial Symbols We conclude this chapter with a few remarks about relationships between several types of quantizations, especially for polynomial symbols. First of all one could wonder about the reason for such a large number of quantization rules. Indeed, the main motivations come from Quantum Mechanics. In Classical Mechanics the state of a system is described by a point in Rd (or in a d-dimensional manifold); for example d = 6N in the case of N particles in the space R3 , the coordinates being the position and momentum of each particle. In Quantum Mechanics, the state of a system is instead described by a function φ in L2 (Rd ) (up to a non-zero multiplicative constant). The (real) observables a(x, ξ) are replaced by densely deﬁned self-adjoint operators A, and (φ, Aφ)L2 represents the mean value of the observable a. The main examples are given by the operators associated with the position observable a(x, ξ) = xj which corresponds to the operator Mj φ = xj φ, and the momentum observable a(x, ξ) = ξj , which corresponds to the derivative Dj = −i∂j . Every reasonable quantization rule should verify these two axioms. The quantization of general observables is formally performed by replacing, in the expression of a(x, ξ), the variables xj and ξj by the above mentioned operators. This unfortunately leads to a non-trivial commutativity problem, as we have of course xj ξj = ξj xj , but Mj Dj = Dj Mj . One preferred quantization rule is certainly the Weyl one since, as we know from Proposition 1.2.10, real-valued symbols a give rise to (formally) self-adjoint operators aw . Another interesting quantization is the so-called Feynmann quantization, which is 1 a → a(x, D) + a(x, D)∗ , 2 where a(x, D) is the standard quantization. Observe that, if cα (x)D α a(x, D) = |α|≤m

is a diﬀerential operator with smooth coeﬃcients, then D α cα (x)f (x) . a(x, D)∗ f (x) = |α|≤m

Notice also that, if a(x, ξ) = xj ξj , aw =

1 1 (xj Dj + Dj xj ) = (a(x, D) + a(x, D)∗ ) . 2 2

(1.8.1)

1.8. Quantizations of Polynomial Symbols

63

More generally (1.8.1) still holds for every polynomial α,β cα,β xβ ξ α with real coeﬃcients, if each monomial has degree at most 1 either with respect to x or ξ. This follows by R-linearity from the following result, which shows, among other things, that generally we have aw = 12 (a(x, D) + a(x, D)∗ ) even if a is real-valued. Proposition 1.8.1. Let a be a real-valued polynomial. Then aw = with r(x, ξ) =

1 (a(x, D) + a(x, D)∗ ) + r(x, D), 2

(α!)−1 2−|α| − 2−1 ∂ξα Dxα a(x, ξ),

|α|≥2

where the above sum is ﬁnite because a is a polynomial. Proof. The desired result follows by an application of the previous Remark 1.2.6 and Proposition 1.2.9 (or, better, from the proofs of those results). In fact, the implied asymptotic expansions become here ﬁnite and the corresponding asymptotic equivalences become equalities, because a(x, ξ) is a polynomial. For example, in dimension d = 1, for a(x, ξ) = x2 ξ 2 , we have 1 (a(x, D) + a(x, D)∗ + I) . 2 Another remark is that, if a(x, ξ) = |β|≤m cβ xβ is a polynomial with complex coeﬃcients, then aw = a(x, D). That is, the Weyl quantization yields multiplication operators for polynomials independent of ξ. Notice that the same trivially happens on the frequency side, namely aw = a(x, D) if a(x, ξ) = |α|≤m cα ξ α , cα ∈ C. aw =

Let us now come to the relationship between Weyl and Anti-Wick quantization. We saw in Section 1.7.2 that any operator Aa with Anti-Wick symbol a(x, ξ) can be written as a Weyl operator with symbol b(x, ξ) given by (1.7.16), i.e., b(z) = (2π)−d (a ∗ σ0,0 )(z), z ∈ R2d , 2

where σ0,0 (z) = 2d e−|z| . Vice-versa, as we already observed, it is not always possible to write an operator with a given Weyl symbol in the Anti-Wick form. In −|ζ|/4 a σ , we have fact, using a ∗ σ0,0 = (2π)d 0,0 , cf. (0.2.4), and σ 0,0 (ζ) = e b = e−|D|

2

/4

a = eΔ/4 a.

Hence one would be tempted to solve this equation as a = e−Δ/4 b, but this does 2 not make sense for general b ∈ S (R2d ), because e|ζ| /4 is not a multiplier for S (R2d ). However this formula holds when b is a polynomial, because its Fourier transform is then supported at the origin. Namely, we have the following result.

64

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

Proposition 1.8.2. Let b(z) be a polynomial, z ∈ R2d . Then the equation b = eΔ/4 a is satisﬁed by a=

∞ (−Δ/4)k

k!

k=0

b,

where the sum is ﬁnite because b is a polynomial. k ∞ b = b. But the Fourier transform Proof. We have to verify that eΔ/4 k=0 (−Δ/4) k! of the left-hand side is e−|ζ|

2

/4

∞ (|ζ|2 /4)k k=0

k!

b(ζ) = b(ζ).

Notes Pseudo-diﬀerential operators were introduced explicitly by Kohn and Nirenberg [127] and Hörmander [115], although early related issues appeared in works by m , Calderón, Seeley, Zygmund and others. The ﬁrst symbol classes considered, S1,0 were suitable for the construction of a parametrix for elliptic diﬀerential operators, but in order to treat similarly non-elliptic diﬀerential operators, the more m general classes Sρ,δ , 0 ≤ δ ≤ ρ ≤ 1, deﬁned by the estimates |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| (1 + |ξ|)m−ρ|α|+δ|β| , were soon revealed to be essential. The study of the local solvability problem for operators of principal type required Beals and Feﬀerman [11] to introduce much more general symbol classes; see also the subsequent works by Beals [9], [10], and Feﬀerman and Phong [78] for applications to sharp lower bounds for pseudo-diﬀerential operators. Meanwhile, in connection with problems in Quantum Mechanics and PDEs in unbounded domains, Berezin and Shubin [14], [15], Cordes [58], Grushin [103], Kumano-go [128], Parenti [156], and Shubin [182] studied pseudo-diﬀerential global calculi in Rd , where x and ξ enter mostly in a symmetric way in the corresponding symbol estimates. Eventually, Hörmander [117] gave a systematic treatment of the whole theory, introducing general symbol classes which included all those considered until then. Applications to spectral theory of globally regular operators appeared in Hörmander [118] and to local solvability of pseudo-diﬀerential operators in Dencker [72]. The symbol classes considered in this chapter are inspired by [11], [117] and Hörmander [119, Vol III, Section 18.4]. More precisely, the class S(M ; Φ, Ψ) corresponds to Hörmander’s class S(M, g), with the metric gx,ξ = |dx|2 /Φ(x, ξ)2 + |dξ|2 /Ψ(x, ξ)2 . Our calculus is in fact simpler, since we assume the conditions Φ ≥ 1 and Ψ ≥ 1. On the other hand the above metric g, under our assumptions, does not need to be slowly varying or temperate in Hörmander’s sense. The conditions of sub-linear growth Φ(x, ξ), Ψ(x, ξ) 1 + |x| + |ξ| basically play a similar

Notes

65

role to (but do not imply) the slow-variation condition for g (cf. Lemma 1.1.4 and Remark 1.1.7). The conditions in (1.3.8) are instead equivalent to saying that the metric g is slowly varying and the weight M is g-continuous, in Hörmander’s terminology. For the invariance of the Weyl calculus with respect to symplectic changes of variables and the connection with the theory of metaplectic operators, which is not discussed here, we refer the reader to Folland [82] and [119, Vol. III, Theorem 18.5.9]. The proof of the L2 -boundedness in Theorem 1.4.1 is a classical and nice application of the symbolic calculus, but it just works under the assumption of the strong uncertainty principle. Hence, that result does not contain the cele0 brated Calderón-Vaillancourt Theorem [34] for symbols in S0,0 , which is instead recaptured in Section 1.7.3. The theory of the general Sobolev spaces tailored to a given symbol class in Section 1.5 is inspired by Shubin [183], Bony and Chemin [23], but is again much simpler here, because we assume the strong uncertainty principle and we can consequently rely on the existence of a parametrix. Similarly, Fredholm properties in the subsequent section are immediate once one has a full symbolic calculus and the continuity and compactness, on every Sobolev space, of operators “of order 0” and “of order lower than 0”, respectively. The presentation of the abstract theory of Fredholm operators in Hilbert spaces in Section 1.6.1 is inspired by Grubb [102] and [119, Vol. III] (where the case of operators on Banach spaces is considered), but the proof of the stability result for the index (Theorem 1.6.3) is extracted from Atiyah and Singer [6]. The short-time Fourier transform, or windowed transform, is a basic tool in Time-Frequency Analysis (see Gröchenig [97]), and plays a fundamental role in signal analysis. Indeed, contrary to the Fourier transform, its magnitude |V u(y, η)| contains the information of what frequencies of a signal are mostly present for a given time interval. Anti-Wick operators were introduced as a quantization rule in Physics by Berezin [13]; see also Friedrichs [84]. They also appeared under the name of localization operators in Daubechies [67], which proposed them as a mathematical tool to localize a signal on the time-frequency plane. Since then they have been extensively studied in signal analysis and found many other applications (see Cordero and Gröchenig [52], [53], Cordero and Rodino [57], Ramanathan and Topiwala, [167], Wong [198] and the references therein). We also recall their employment as approximation of pseudo-diﬀerential operators (wave packets); see Córdoba and Feﬀerman [60], Folland [82], Lerner [133], Tataru [186]. Anti-Wick operators are also called short-time Fourier transform multipliers, see Feichtinger and Nowak [81] for a survey. The proof of the L2 -boundedness in Theorem 1.7.14, for operators with sym0 bols in S0,0 , is a continuous version of the almost diagonalization via Gabor frames in Rochberg and Tachizawa [171]. It is one of the most elementary proofs we know, since it avoids the use of the Cotlar-Stein lemma (and Schur’s test). Moreover it

66

Chapter 1. Global Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

generalizes to less regular symbols (see Gröchenig [98]) and even to Fourier integral operators (see Cordero, Nicola and Rodino [55] and the references therein). Diﬀerent proofs can be found in the already quoted paper [34], Coifman, and Meyer [51], [97, Theorem 14.5.2], [119, Vol. III, Theorem 18.6.3], Hwang [121], Stein [185], Buzano and Toft [31]. Finally, the use of Anti-Wick techniques in the proof of the Sharp Gårding inequality (Theorem 1.7.15) appeared in [60] and [119, Vol. III, Theorem 18.1.4]. More general symbol classes were considered by similar techniques in [133]. The Feﬀerman-Phong inequality mentioned after Theorem 1.7.15 was proved in [78] 2 for symbols in S1,0 and in [119, Vol. III, Theorem 18.6.8] for the classes S(h−2 , g); see also Feﬀerman and Phong [77], [79]. For recent work about lower bounds for pseudo-diﬀerential operators we refer the reader to the references in Nicola [153]. ˜ The spaces H(M ) in Section 1.7.4 are a type of modulation spaces, widely used in Time-Frequency Analysis. They were ﬁrst introduced by H. Feichtinger in [80]; see [97, Chapter 11] and the references therein for a detailed study. The results in Section 1.8 can also be proved without using the symbolic calculus, by direct computations, see Boggiatto and Rodino [21].

Chapter 2

Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials Summary Let P be a linear operator, P : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ), with extension to a map from S (Rd ) to S (Rd ). According to Deﬁnition 1.3.8 we say that P is globally regular if, for any f ∈ S(Rd ), all the solutions u ∈ S (Rd ) of the equation P u = f belong to S(Rd ). In particular then, all the solutions u ∈ S (Rd ) of the equation P u = 0 belong to S(Rd ). An important tool for deducing global regularity, when P is a pseudo-diﬀerential operator, is given by Theorem 1.3.6, namely: the existence of a left parametrix P˜ of P , i.e., P˜ P = I + R where R : S (Rd ) → S(Rd ), implies global regularity for P , as well as precise estimates in generalized Sobolev spaces, cf. Proposition 1.5.8. Besides, the simultaneous existence of a right parametrix gives Fredholmness, cf. Theorem 1.6.9. The main subject of this chapter, and of Chapter 3, is the study of the above properties for relevant classes of operators, including as basic examples partial diﬀerential operators with polynomial coeﬃcients in Rd : P =

cαβ xβ Dα .

(2.0.1)

|α|+|β|≤m

The key idea is to model on the structure of P , and deﬁne a suitable couple of weights Φ, Ψ satisfying the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10), in order to obtain a pseudo-diﬀerential framework where parametrices of P can be constructed. In this chapter attention is limited to Γ-pseudo-diﬀerential operators, corresponding to a case when Φ and Ψ coincide. A simple example is Φ(x, ξ) = Ψ(x, ξ) = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 .

68

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

We review the corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential calculus in Section 2.1. In short, by writing z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d , the symbols in Γm (Rd ), m ∈ R, are deﬁned by the estimates, for γ ∈ N2d : |∂zγ a(z)| zm−|γ| ,

z ∈ R2d .

(2.0.2)

According to Deﬁnition 1.3.1, we call Γ-elliptic the symbols satisfying |z|m |a(z)| m d for large z. A relevant subclass of Γ (R ) is given by all the symbols admitting an asymptotic expansion a ∼ ∞ a , k=0 m−k with am−k (z) positively homogeneous of degree m−k in R2d ; for these symbols Γ-ellipticity amounts to assuming am (z) = 0 for every z = 0. For m ∈ N the corresponding Sobolev spaces HΓm (Rd ) can be explicitly deﬁned by setting

xβ Dα u L2 < ∞. (2.0.3)

u HΓm = |α|+|β|≤m

Section 2.2 and 2.3 are devoted to the study in this framework of the partial diﬀerential operators P in (2.0.1). With z = (x, ξ) and γ = (β, α) the symbol of P , in the standard quantization, can be re-written in the form cγ z γ . (2.0.4) p(z) = |γ|≤m

The Γ-ellipticity reads pm (z) = |γ|=m cγ z γ = 0 for z = 0; this provides global regularity and Fredholm property of the map P : HΓm (Rd ) → L2 (Rd ). A motivating example is the harmonic oscillator of Quantum Mechanics: H = −Δ + |x|2

(2.0.5)

with elliptic symbol |z|2 . As appetizer to Chapter 4, devoted to Spectral Theory, we begin here to compute eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of H. We also study Γ-elliptic ordinary diﬀerential equations, by using the theory of Asymptotic Integration; we prove here some decay properties of the solutions, which we shall extend later in the book to linear and semi-linear partial diﬀerential equations, see Chapter 6. In Section 2.4 we consider Γ-hypoelliptic symbols. Namely, we limit attention to polynomial symbols p(z), as in (2.0.4), and assume |∂ γ p(z)| |p(z)|z−ρ|γ|

(2.0.6)

for some ρ, 0 < ρ ≤ 1 and large z (the case ρ = 1 corresponds to Γ-ellipticity, deﬁned as before). Polynomials p(z) satisfying (2.0.6), called in the sequel Hpolynomials, were ﬁrst studied by Hörmander in connection with the Schwartz’ problem of the interior regularity of the solutions of equations with constant coeﬃcients. We recall in Section 2.4 some equivalent deﬁnitions and basic properties. Following Hörmander’s presentation, we shall argue in arbitrary dimension

Summary

69

n, though in our applications n = 2d is even. If (2.0.6) is satisﬁed, we can construct parametrices for the operator P in (2.0.1), hence in particular P is globally regular. However, with respect to the Γ-elliptic case, P is not Fredholm on the spaces HΓm (Rd ), cf. (2.0.3), and there is a loss of regularity in the related a priori estimates. It is then convenient to look for more appropriate weight functions, depending on the particular form of p(z), so that p(z) can be regarded as elliptic symbol in the new frame. This is performed in Sections 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8 for some special subclasses of the H-polynomials. Namely in Section 2.5 we consider the quasi-elliptic polynomials; representative examples for the corresponding class of operators are given by Dx + rxk ,

x ∈ R, k ≥ 1, Im r = 0,

(2.0.7)

and by the generalized harmonic oscillator −Δ + |x|2k ,

x ∈ Rd , k ≥ 1.

(2.0.8)

In Section 2.6 we study multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials, which contain quasielliptic polynomials as a particular case. Simple examples for the related class of operators are Dx6 + x4 Dx4 + x6 , x ∈ R (2.0.9) and −Δ + V (x1 , x2 ),

(x1 , x2 ) ∈ R2 ,

(2.0.10)

where the potential V is given by V (x1 , x2 ) = x61 + x41 x42 + x62 . In general, an H-polynomial is multi-quasi-elliptic if 1/2 2γ |p(z)| ΛP (z) = z

(2.0.11)

(2.0.12)

γ∈V (P)

for large z, the sum being extended to the set V (P) of all the vertices γ of the Newton polyhedron P of p(z). The corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential calculus is developed in Section 2.7. In fact Φ(z) = Ψ(z) = ΛP (z)ρ give a couple of weights for 0 < ρ ≤ 1/μ, where μ ≥ 1 is the so-called formal order of P. The condition (2.0.12) can be read as ellipticity with respect to such a couple of weights; the m Γ-ellipticity is recaptured when ΛP (z) |z| . The results of Chapter 1 apply m d therefore to the class ΓP (R ), m ∈ R, of all the symbols a(z) satisfying |∂zγ a(z)| ΛP (z)m−|γ|/μ ,

z ∈ R2d .

(2.0.13)

Moreover, the weights ΛP (z) in (2.0.12) enjoy peculiar properties, which suggest m d to consider also the subclass M Γm P of all a(z) ∈ ΓP (R ) satisfying d z γ ∂zγ a(z) ∈ Γm P (R )

(2.0.14)

70

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

for any γ = (γ1 , . . . , γ2d ) ∈ N2d with γj ∈ {0, 1}. In particular, the symbol of the parametrix of a multi-quasi-elliptic operator belongs to this class. This approach allows us to establish precise Lp estimates for multi-quasielliptic operators. Namely, in Section 2.8 we prove that every pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol in M Γ0P (Rd ) is bounded on Lp , 1 < p < ∞. We may then consider, as generalization of (2.0.3), the Banach space HPp with norm

xβ D α u Lp , (2.0.15)

u p,P = (β,α)∈V (P)

cf. (2.0.12) with z = (x, ξ), γ = (β, α). The operator P corresponding to the polynomial symbol p(z) in (2.0.12) is then a Fredholm map HPp → Lp for 1 < p < ∞.

2.1 Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators The ﬁrst basic examples of the general classes of symbols considered in the previous Chapter 1 are the Γ-classes, deﬁned below. Write z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d and, according to the preceding notation, 1/2 . z = (1 + |z|2 )1/2 = 1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 Deﬁnition 2.1.1. We deﬁne Γm (Rd ), m ∈ R, as the set of all functions a(z) ∈ C ∞ (R2d ) satisfying, for all γ ∈ N2d , |∂zγ a(z)| zm−|γ| ,

z ∈ R2d .

(2.1.1)

As we observed before Deﬁnition 1.1.1, the weights Φ(z) = Ψ(z) = z are sub-linear and temperate, cf. (1.1.1), (1.1.2). More generally we can deﬁne the following classes. d Deﬁnition 2.1.2. We deﬁne Γm ρ (R ), with m ∈ R, 0 < ρ ≤ 1, as the set of all the functions a(z) ∈ C ∞ (R2d ) satisfying, for all γ ∈ N2d ,

|∂zγ a(z)| zm−ρ|γ| ,

z ∈ R2d .

(2.1.2)

In the above deﬁnition we assumed ρ > 0, so the strong uncertainty principle d m d (1.1.10) is satisﬁed. Note that Γm 1 (R ) = Γ (R ). Also, it is useful to introduce m d the subspace of Γ (R ) of the polyhomogeneous symbols. Let us write Hm (R2d \ {0}), m ∈ R, for the class of functions a(z) ∈ C ∞ (R2d \ {0}) which are positively homogeneous of degree m in R2d , i.e., a(tz) = tm a(z) for t > 0, z ∈ R2d , z = 0. d m d Deﬁnition 2.1.3. We deﬁne Γm cl (R ) as the subset of Γ (R ) of all the symbols a(z) which admit asymptotic expansion

a(z) ∼

∞ k=0

am−k (z)

(2.1.3)

2.1. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

71

for a sequence of functions am−k ∈ Hm−k (R2d \ {0}), k = 0, 1, . . . . By (2.1.3) we mean that, considering χ(z) ∈ C ∞ (R2d ), with χ(z) = 1 for |z| ≥ 2, χ(z) = 0 for |z| ≤ 1, we have for every integer N ≥ 1: a(z) − χ(z)am−k (z) ∈ Γm−N (Rd ). (2.1.4) 0≤k
In turn, given a sequence {am−k } as in Deﬁnition 2.1.3, we may construct a ∈ d 2d Γm cl (R ) satisfying (2.1.4), uniquely determined modulo symbols in S(R ). The m 2d function am ∈ H (R \ {0}) is called the principal symbol, or principal part of d a ∈ Γm cl (R ). Let us now pass to consideration of the corresponding classes of pseudo-difd m d ferential operators, which we shall denote by OPΓm (Rd ), OPΓm ρ (R ), OPΓcl (R ) respectively. The rules of symbolic calculus in Section 1.2 apply obviously, in particular the deﬁnition of the classes does not depend on quantization, cf. Remark 1.2.6. Let us just recall the composition formula, limiting attention to the standard quantization (that we shall tacitly adopt in the following of the section): u(ξ) dξ, ¯ (2.1.5) a(x, D)u(x) = eixξ a(x, ξ) d with action a(x, D) : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ), S (Rd ) → S (Rd ). If a ∈ Γm ρ (R ), b ∈ n d Γρ (R ), 0 < ρ ≤ 1, then the operator c(x, D) = a(x, D)b(x, D) belongs to OPΓm+n (Rd ) with symbol ρ

c(x, ξ) ∼

(α!)−1 ∂ξα a(x, ξ)Dxα b(x, ξ).

(2.1.6)

α

We leave to the reader to apply the other results of Section 1.2 for general quantizations, concerning symbols of compositions, transposed operators and formal add joints. It is worth observing that the polyhomogeneous classes Γm ) are stable cl (R ∞ m d under such operations; so forexample, taking a ∈ Γcl (R ) with a ∼ k=0 am−k ∞ n d and b ∈ Γcl (R ) with b ∼ j=0 bn−j , we get c(x, D) = a(x, D)b(x, D) where ∞ d (R ), c ∼ c c ∈ Γm+n cl s=0 m+n−s , and cm+n−s = (α!)−1 ∂ξα am−k Dxα bn−j (2.1.7) k+j+2|α|=s

belonging to Hm+n−s (R2d \ {0}). In particular: cm+n = am bn ∈ Hm+n (R2d \ {0}).

(2.1.8)

Let us now apply the results of Section 1.3.1, treating ﬁrst the Γ-elliptic symbol. For simplicity, we shall refer only to the Γm (Rd ) classes; the results can be d obviously generalized to Γm ρ (R ).

72

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

Deﬁnition 2.1.4. Let a ∈ Γm (Rd ), m ∈ R. We say that a is Γ-elliptic if there exists R > 0 such that |z|m |a(z)| for |z| ≥ R. (2.1.9) d m d When applying this deﬁnition in Γm cl (R ) ⊂ Γ (R ), we shall rather rely on the following equivalent notion of Γ-ellipticity. d Proposition 2.1.5. The symbol a ∈ Γm cl (R ) is Γ-elliptic if and only if the principal part am satisﬁes (2.1.10) am (z) = 0 for every z = 0.

Proof. Because of the homogeneity of am , the assumption (2.1.10) is equivalent to the estimate m (2.1.11) |z| |am (z)| for z = 0. On the other hand, from (2.1.4) with N = 1 we have, for any ﬁxed R > 0, |a(z) − am (z)| |z|m−1

for |z| ≥ R.

Then, if (2.1.9) is satisﬁed, we deduce for suitable positive constants C and : |z|m ≤ |a(z)| ≤ |am (z)| + C |z|m−1

for |z| ≥ R.

Since for suﬃciently large |z| we have C |z|

m−1

≤

m |z| , 2

m

we conclude 2 |z| ≤ |am (z)|, hence (2.1.11). Symmetrically we may prove that (2.1.11) implies (2.1.9). From Theorem 1.3.6 we have the following result on the existence of parametrices. Let us observe that Γ-ellipticity in (2.1.9), (2.1.10) is invariant under diﬀerent quantizations. Theorem 2.1.6. Let a ∈ Γm (Rd ) be Γ-elliptic. Then there exists b ∈ Γ−m (Rd ) such that b(x, D) is a parametrix of a(x, D), i.e., a(x, D)b(x, D) = I + S1 ,

b(x, D)a(x, D) = I + S2

where S1 and S2 are regularizing operators. Hence a(x,D) is globally regular, i.e., u ∈ S (Rd ) and a(x, D)u ∈ S(Rd ) imply u ∈ S(Rd ). d The result remains valid for symbols a ∈ Γm cl (R ) satisfying (2.1.10), the −m d symbol of the parametrix belonging then to Γcl (R ), with principal part 1/am . We may now apply the results of Section 1.7, concerning the Anti-Wick quantization, to symbols in the Γ-classes. In particular we shall use the following version of Proposition 1.7.12.

2.1. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

73

Theorem 2.1.7. Let a ∈ Γs (Rd ) be Γ-elliptic, s ∈ R, with a(z) > 0 for every z ∈ R2d . Denote by Aa the operator with Anti-Wick symbol a. The map Aa : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ) is an isomorphism, extending to an isomorphism on S (Rd ). Moreover, the −m inverse A−1 (Rd ). a belongs to OPΓ Take for example, for s ∈ R, 2

2

as (z) = zs = (1 + |x| + |ξ| )s/2 ,

(2.1.12)

satisfying the assumptions of Theorem 2.1.7. We may refer to such symbols in the following deﬁnition of Γ-Sobolev spaces. Deﬁnition 2.1.8. Let as (z), s ∈ R, be the symbol in (2.1.12) and write Ws for the operator with Anti-Wick symbol as . Then we set (2.1.13) HΓs (Rd ) = Ws−1 L2 (Rd ) = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : Ws u ∈ L2 (Rd )}. All the properties in Sections 1.5 and 1.6 apply. In particular HΓs are Hilbert spaces with respect to the scalar product (u, v)HΓs = (Ws u, Ws v)L2

(2.1.14)

and the corresponding norm

u HΓs = Ws u L2 .

(2.1.15)

In Deﬁnition 2.1.8 we may of course replace as (z) with any other strictly positive Γ-elliptic symbol, with equivalence of norms. More generally we can deﬁne the HΓs (Rd ) spaces using arbitrary Γ-elliptic symbols, as stated in the following proposition, cf. Deﬁnition 1.5.2. Proposition 2.1.9. Let T ∈ OPΓs (Rd ) have Γ-elliptic symbol, cf. Deﬁnition 2.1.4. Then HΓs (Rd ) = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : T u ∈ L2 (Rd )} and on HΓs (Rd ) an equivalent Hilbert space structure is given by the scalar product (u, v)HΓs = (T u, T v)L2 + (Ru, Rv)L2

(2.1.16)

where R is a regularizing operator associated to a parametrix T˜ ∈ OPΓ−s (Rd ) of T , namely T˜T = I + R. From Proposition 1.5.5, we have: Theorem 2.1.10. Every A ∈ OPΓm (Rd ) deﬁnes, for all s ∈ R, a continuous operator A : HΓs (Rd ) → HΓs−m (Rd ). (2.1.17) Later on in the book we shall also use the following result of boundedness in the standard Sobolev spaces H s (Rd ).

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

74

Theorem 2.1.11. Every A ∈ OPΓ0 (Rd ) deﬁnes, for all s ∈ R, a continuous operator (2.1.18) A : H s (Rd ) → H s (Rd ). Proof. Consider the pseudo-diﬀerential operator Dt with standard symbol ξt , t ∈ R. We know that u ∈ H s (Rd ) if and only if Ds u ∈ L2 (Rd ), cf. Section 0.2. Hence, by writing Ds Au = Ds AD−s Ds u, we have to prove the boundedness of the map Ds AD−s : L2 (Rd ) → L2 (Rd ).

(2.1.19)

The operator in (2.1.19) does not belong to OPΓ0 (Rd ), however we may regard Ds , A and D−s as operators with symbols in the classes S(ξs ; 1, 1), S(1; 1, 1) and S(ξ−s ; 1, 1) respectively. Hence Ds AD−s ∈ OPS(1; 1, 1) by Theorem 1.2.16 and (2.1.19) is granted, cf. Theorem 1.7.14. Other properties of the HΓs (Rd ) spaces, following from Section 1.5, are compact immersions j : HΓs (Rd ) → HΓt (Rd ) for s > t, and compactness of the maps A : HΓs (Rd ) → HΓt (Rd ) for A ∈ OPΓm (Rd ) whenever ! s − t > m. In particular if A is regularizing, then A belongs to OPΓ−∞ (Rd ) := m OPΓm (Rd ), hence it is continuous and compact from HΓs (Rd ) to HΓt (Rd ) for any s, t ∈ R. Moreover, for every s ∈ R we have continuous immersions j : S(Rd ) → HΓs (Rd ),

j : HΓs (Rd ) → S (Rd )

and moreover HΓs (Rd ) = S(Rd ),

s∈R

HΓs (Rd ) = S (Rd ).

s∈R

Finally, the spaces HΓs (Rd ), HΓ−s (Rd ) are dual to each other with respect to the bilinear pairing u, v = u(x)v(x) dx. The following equivalent deﬁnition when m ∈ N is peculiar for the spaces HΓs (Rd ). Theorem 2.1.12. Let m ∈ N. An equivalent deﬁnition of the space HΓm (Rd ) is given by HΓm (Rd ) = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : xβ Dα u ∈ L2 (Rd ) for |α| + |β| ≤ m}

(2.1.20)

with equivalent norm

u ∗HΓm =

|α|+|β|≤m

xβ Dα u L2 .

(2.1.21)

2.1. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

75

Proof. Assume ﬁrst u ∈ HΓm (Rd ), according to the Deﬁnition 2.1.8. Since xβ Dα ∈ OPΓm (Rd ) if |α| + |β| ≤ m, then xβ D α u ∈ HΓ0 (Rd ) = L2 (Rd ) in view of Theorem 2.1.10, and u ∗H m can be estimated in terms of u HΓm . Γ In the opposite direction, it will be convenient to estimate the norm coming from (2.1.16) in terms of u ∗H m . Namely, we shall ﬁx an operator T ∈ OPΓm (Rd ) Γ with Γ-elliptic symbol, see below, and consider

u 2HΓm = T u 2L2 + Ru 2L2 ,

(2.1.22)

where R is a regularizing operator associated to a left parametrix T˜ ∈ OPΓ−m (Rd ) of T . We may then estimate, for some C > 0,

u HΓm ≤ T u L2 + C u L2 .

(2.1.23)

T = A−m P

(2.1.24)

Choose T as follows: d where A−m is any operator in OPΓ−m cl (R ) with elliptic symbol and xβ D α xβ D α . P =

(2.1.25)

|α|+|β|≤m d In fact, using Leibniz’ rule we have that the principal symbol of P ∈ OPΓ2m cl (R ) is given by p2m (x, ξ) = x2β ξ 2α , |α|+|β|=2m

which satisﬁes the Γ-ellipticity condition in Proposition 2.1.5. Hence T in (2.1.24) d belongs to OPΓm cl (R ) with elliptic symbol, cf. (2.1.10). Combining (2.1.23) with (2.1.24), (2.1.25), and observing that A−m xβ Dα ∈ OPΓ0 (Rd ), we obtain

A−m xβ D α (xβ Dα u) L2 + C u L2

u HΓm ≤ |α|+|β|≤m

≤

C u ∗HΓm

for a new constant C . The theorem is therefore proved.

HΓs (Rd ),

we may now give a more precise Referring to the Sobolev-type spaces frame to Theorem 2.1.6. Namely, particularizing the results of Sections 1.5, 1.6, we have the following two theorems. Theorem 2.1.13. Consider A ∈ OPΓm (Rd ) with Γ-elliptic symbol and assume u ∈ S (Rd ), Au ∈ HΓs (Rd ). Then u ∈ HΓs+m (Rd ) and, for every t < s + m,

u H s+m ≤ C Au HΓs + u HΓt (2.1.26) Γ

for a positive constant C depending on s and t.

76

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

In particular if m is a positive integer, we may refer to the equivalent norm (2.1.21) and re-write (2.1.26) for s = 0, t = 0:

xβ Dα u L2 ≤ C ( Au L2 + u L2 ) . (2.1.27) |α|+|β|≤m

To be deﬁnite, in the following statement we shall denote by As the restriction of A : S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) to HΓs (Rd ), s ∈ R, or equivalently the extension of A : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ) to HΓs (Rd ). Theorem 2.1.14. Consider A ∈ OPΓm (Rd ) with Γ-elliptic symbol. Then: (i) As ∈ Fred(HΓs (Rd ), HΓs−m (Rd )). (ii) ind As = dim Ker A − dim Ker A∗ , ind As = dim Ker A − dim Ker t A, where A∗ is the formal adjoint and t A is the transposed operator. Observe that the index is then independent of s.

(iii) If T ∈ OPΓm (Rd ) with m < m, then As + Ts ∈ Fred (HΓs (Rd ), HΓs−m (Rd )) and ind (As + Ts ) = ind As . (iv) Suppose As : HΓs (Rd ) → HΓs (Rd ) is invertible for some s ∈ R; then it is invertible for all s ∈ R, and the inverse is an operator in OPΓ−m (Rd ). In conclusion, we pass to consider the hypoelliptic case, the natural frame d being now the classes Γm ρ (R ), 0 < ρ ≤ 1. d Deﬁnition 2.1.15. We say that a ∈ Γm ρ (R ), 0 < ρ ≤ 1, m ∈ R, is Γρ -hypoelliptic if there exist m ∈ R, m ≤ m, and R > 0 such that m

|z|

|a(z)| ,

for |z| ≥ R

(2.1.28)

and, for every γ ∈ N2d , |∂zγ a(z)| |a(z)| z−ρ|γ| ,

for |z| ≥ R.

(2.1.29)

d Note that the assumption of Γ-ellipticity (2.1.9) for a symbol a ∈ Γm ρ (R ) corresponds to taking m = m in (2.1.28) and gives automatically (2.1.29). So the Γ-ellipticity implies Γρ -hypoellipticity. The new interesting case is then m < m, for which we have the following counterpart of Theorems 2.1.6 and 2.1.13. d Theorem 2.1.16. Let a ∈ Γm ρ (R ), 0 < ρ ≤ 1, be Γρ -hypoelliptic, for some m < m −m d in (2.1.28). Then there exists b ∈ Γρ (R ) such that, denoted A = a(x, D), B = b(x, D), we have

AB = I + S1 ,

BA = I + S2 ,

with S1 and S2 regularizing operators. Hence A is globally regular. Moreover, if we assume u ∈ S (Rd ), Au ∈ HΓs (Rd ), then we have u ∈ HΓs+m (Rd ) and, for every t<s+m,

u H s+m ≤ C Au HΓs + u HΓt (2.1.30) Γ

for a positive constant C depending on s and t.

2.2. Γ-Elliptic Diﬀerential Operators; the Harmonic Oscillator

77

The estimate (2.1.30) presents a loss of m − m in the order of the Γ-Sobolev spaces, with respect to the Γ-elliptic case. So, if m < m we cannot regard A as a Fredholm map from HΓs (Rd ) to HΓs−m (Rd ).

2.2 Γ-Elliptic Diﬀerential Operators; the Harmonic Oscillator d All diﬀerential operators in OPΓm ρ (R ), 0 < ρ ≤ 1, have polynomial coeﬃcients. Namely: d Proposition 2.2.1. Assume p(x, ξ) ∈ Γm ρ (R ) is of the form p(x, ξ) = aα (x)ξ α |α|≤m

for some aα (x) ∈ C ∞ (Rd ). Then aα (x) is a polynomial. Proof. From (2.1.2) we have, for all β ∈ Nd , |∂xβ p(x, ξ)| zm−ρ|β| ,

z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

Hence, taking |β| > m/ρ, we have, for = ρ|β| − m, ∂xβ aα (x)ξ α z− , |α|≤m

which can be satisﬁed only if ∂xβ aα (x) = 0 for all x ∈ Rd , i.e., aα is a polynomial. Let us then consider P =

cαβ xβ Dα ,

cαβ ∈ C,

(2.2.1)

|α|+|β|≤m

with symbol, according to the standard quantization: p(x, ξ) = cαβ xβ ξ α .

(2.2.2)

|α|+|β|≤m

Setting z = (x, ξ), γ = (β, α) we shall also write for short cγ z γ . p(z) =

(2.2.3)

|γ|≤m d We have p ∈ Γm cl (R ) and the Γ-ellipticity condition (2.1.9) reads cγ z γ , for |z| ≥ R |z|m |γ|≤m

(2.2.4)

78

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

with R > 0 suﬃciently large. The principal part is given by pm (z) = cγ z γ ,

(2.2.5)

|γ|=m

and the equivalent Γ-ellipticity condition (2.1.10) is cγ z γ = 0 for z = 0.

(2.2.6)

|γ|=m

Under the assumption (2.2.6) we may apply Theorems 2.1.6, 2.1.13 and 2.1.14. In the following, we discuss some relevant examples of Γ-elliptic diﬀerential operators. Consider ﬁrst the one-dimensional case. Deﬁne for x ∈ R and D = −id/dx as standard: (2.2.7) L = Dx − rx, r ∈ C. The principal symbol is given by ξ + rx and (2.2.6) is satisﬁed if and only if Im r = 0. The transposed operator is given by t

L = −Dx − rx.

(2.2.8)

The classical solutions of Lu = 0 are the functions u(t) = C exp[irx2 /2],

C ∈ C,

(2.2.9)

which for C = 0 belong to S(R), or S (R), if and only if Im r > 0. We may regard L as a Fredholm operator, setting for example L : HΓ1 (R) → L2 (R), with ind L = dim Ker L − dim Ker t L given by 1 for Im r > 0, ind L = −1 for Im r < 0.

(2.2.10)

(2.2.11)

We may now consider the case of a generic ordinary diﬀerential operator with polynomial coeﬃcients. The Γ-ellipticity condition (2.2.6) on the principal symbol reads cαβ xβ ξ α = 0 for (x, ξ) ∈ R2 , (x, ξ) = (0, 0). (2.2.12) pm (x, ξ) = α+β=m

Factorizing we then obtain pm (x, ξ) = c(ξ − r1 x) · · · (ξ − rm x)

(2.2.13)

with Im rj = 0, j = 1, . . . , m, c = 0. Hence we may write after multiplication by c−1 : P = (Dx − r1 x) · · · (Dx − rm x) + aαβ xβ Dα (2.2.14) α+β<m

2.2. Γ-Elliptic Diﬀerential Operators; the Harmonic Oscillator

79

for some constants aαβ ∈ C. We may regard P as a Fredholm operator P : HΓm (R) → L2 (R).

(2.2.15)

The index does not depend on the lower order terms in the sum in (2.2.14), in view of Theorem 2.1.14, (iii), and it is then given by the sum of the indices of the factors Dx − rj x, j = 1, . . . , m, cf. Corollary 1.6.5, which we may compute by (2.2.11). We therefore obtain the following result. Theorem 2.2.2. Consider P in (2.2.14), (2.2.15) and assume Im rj > 0 for j = 1, . . . , m+ , Im rj < 0 for j = m+ + 1, . . . , m, m = m+ + m− (we do not exclude the case m+ = 0 or m− = 0). Then P is a Fredholm operator with ind P = m+ − m− .

(2.2.16)

Concerning the existence of a non-trivial solution u ∈ S (R), hence u ∈ S(R), of P u = 0, we may obtain the following conclusions. If m+ − m− > 0, then ind P > 0, therefore dim Ker P > 0 and a non-trivial solution exists. Moreover, since dim Ker P and dim Ker t P cannot exceed m, if m+ = 0, m− = m, then ind P = −m and a non-trivial solution does not exist. See the next section for further investigation. As an example in dimension d ≥ 1, we then ﬁx attention on the harmonic oscillator of Quantum Mechanics, H = − + |x|2 ,

x ∈ Rd ,

(2.2.17)

which will play an important role in the sequel of the book. Consider for λ ∈ C: 2

P = H − λ = − + |x| − λ, 2

2

P : HΓ2 (Rd ) → L2 (Rd ).

(2.2.18)

2

The principal symbol |z| = |x| +|ξ| satisﬁes obviously the Γ-ellipticity condition, and P is a Fredholm operator with ind P =ind H = 0 because t H = H. Non-trivial solutions u ∈ S (Rd ) of P u = Hu − λu = 0 belong to S(Rd ) and exist or not, according to the values of λ. Namely, let us return to the one-dimensional case and consider ﬁrst the equation Hu − λu = −u + x2 u − λu = 0,

x ∈ R.

(2.2.19)

It is convenient to introduce Ψ+ = x −

d , dx

Ψ− = x +

with respective Γ-elliptic symbols x − iξ,

x + iξ.

d dx

(2.2.20)

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

80

The operators Ψ± are the celebrated creation (Ψ+ ) and annihilation (Ψ− ) operators of Quantum Mechanics. They are of type (2.2.7), and the preceding arguments apply obviously. Since Ψ+ Ψ− = H − 1, then for λ = 1 the equation (2.2.19) admits the solution 2

u0 (x) = e−x

/2

.

(2.2.21)

n = 0, 1, . . . ,

(2.2.22)

un (x) = Ψn+ u0 (x) ∈ S(R).

(2.2.23)

We may then prove that for λ = 2n + 1, a solution is given by In fact, arguing by induction on n, we set un = Ψ+ un−1 and compute Hun = (Ψ+ Ψ− + 1)un = (Ψ+ Ψ− + 1)Ψ+ un−1 = Ψ+ (Ψ− Ψ+ − 1)un−1 + 2Ψ+ un−1 . Since Ψ− Ψ+ = H + 1, and Hun−1 = (2n − 1)un−1 by the inductive hypothesis, we obtain Hun

=

Ψ+ Hun−1 + 2Ψ+ un−1

=

Ψ+ (2n − 1)un−1 + 2Ψ+ un−1 = (2n + 1)Ψ+ un−1 .

Also, let us compute

un 2L2 = (un , un )L2 = (Ψn+ u0 , Ψn+ u0 )L2 . Since the formal adjoint of Ψ+ is Ψ− , we have n−1 n−1

un 2L2 = (Ψ− Ψn+ u0 , Ψn−1 + u0 )L2 = ((H + 1)Ψ+ u0 , Ψ+ u0 )L2 n−1 2 = 2n(Ψn−1 + u0 , Ψ+ u0 )L2 = 2n un−1 L2 .

Hence

√

un 2L2 = 2n n! u0 2L2 = 2n n! π.

(2.2.24)

Since Ψ− u0 = 0, a similar computation also shows that (un , um )L2 = 0 for n = m, that yields the orthogonality of the system {un }, n ∈ N. Let us now deﬁne the n-th order Hermite polynomial by

n 2 2 d e−x /2 , Pn (x) = cn ex /2 x − dx

(2.2.25)

(2.2.26)

2.2. Γ-Elliptic Diﬀerential Operators; the Harmonic Oscillator

81

cn = 2−n/2 (n!)−1/2 π −1/4 . We have therefore proved that the Hermite functions, still written by un by abuse, 2

un (x) = Pn (x)e−x

/2

,

n = 0, 1, . . . ,

(2.2.27)

give an orthonormal system of L2 (R). To prove completeness, it will be suﬃcient to argue on g ∈ S(R) and assume +∞ g(x)un (x)dx = 0 for all n ∈ N. (2.2.28) −∞

Since we may write xn as a linear combination of Pj (x), 0 ≤ j ≤ n, then (2.2.28) implies +∞ 2 g(x)xn e−x /2 dx = 0 for all n ∈ N. −∞

Compute now the Fourier transform +∞ ∞ 2 (−ixξ)n −x2 /2 ¯ Fx→ξ g(x)e g(x)e−x /2 dx = n! −∞ n=0 (−iξ)n +∞ 2 = lim g(x)xn e−x /2 dx ¯ = 0. N →∞ n! −∞ n≤N

A function in S(R) which has zero Fourier transform must be the zero function, 2 hence g(x)e−x /2 = 0 for all x ∈ R, and therefore g(x) ≡ 0. Let us pass to consider the higher dimensional case. It will be suﬃcient to search for solutions of Hu − λu = 0 of the form u(x) = uk (x) = Πdj=1 Pkj (xj )e−

|x|2 2

,

where k = (k1 , . . . , kd ) ∈ Nd and Pn stands for the n-th Hermite polynomial. Writing Hj = Dx2j + x2j , since Hj uk = (2kj + 1)uk , we obtain Huk =

d

H j uk =

j=1

d

(2kj + 1)uk .

j=1

We may summarize the preceding results as follows. Theorem 2.2.3. The equation 2

P u = Hu − λu = −u + |x| u − λu = 0, admits for λ = λk =

d j=1

(2kj + 1),

u ∈ S (Rd ),

k = (k1 , . . . , kd ) ∈ Nd ,

(2.2.29)

82

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

the solutions in S(Rd ), uk (x) =

d

|x|2 2

Pkj (xj )e−

,

(2.2.30)

j=1

which form an orthonormal system in L2 (Rd ). Because of the completeness of the Hermite functions uk , k ∈ Nd , we know from Spectral Theory, see Theorem 4.2.9 in the next Chapter 4, that for λ = λk the map P = H − λ : HΓ2 (Rd ) → L2 (Rd ) is an isomorphism, with inverse P −1 = (H − λ)−1 : L2 (Rd ) → HΓ2 (Rd ) belonging to OPΓ−2 (Rd ), cf. Theorem 2.1.14, (iv). Returning to (2.2.29), (2.2.30) we observe that the eigenvalues λ = 2K + d, K ∈ N, appear with multiplicity if d > 1. Precisely, corresponding to λ = 2K + d we have in (2.2.30) " k ∈ Nd ,

d

# kj = K

=

j=1

K +d−1 d−1

diﬀerent eigenfunctions, cf. (0.3.16). Let us also observe that, taking into account multiplicity, the number of the eigenvalues which do not exceed λ ∈ R+ is given by " N (λ) = k ∈ Nd ,

d

kj ≤ K

j=1

=

K h+d−1 h=0

d−1

#

K +d , d

=

(2.2.31)

cf. (0.3.15). Here we have set K = [(λ − d)/2], the integer part of (λ − d)/2. Hence for λ → +∞, N (λ) =

(K + d)(K + d − 1) · · · (K + 1) Kd λd ∼ ∼ d . d! d! 2 d!

(2.2.32)

2.3 Asymptotic Integration and Solutions of Exponential Type Let us return to consider the generic Γ-elliptic ordinary diﬀerential operator, P ∈ OPΓm (R). In view of the discussion in the preceding section, we may write, for

2.3. Asymptotic Integration and Solutions of Exponential Type x ∈ R, P = (Dx − r1 x) . . . (Dx − rm x) +

aαβ xβ Dα ,

83

(2.3.1)

α+β<m

with Im rj = 0, j = 1, . . . , m, aαβ ∈ C. The classical solutions of P u = 0 extend to entire functions of x ∈ C. A precise analysis in the complex domain is given by the theory of Asymptotic Integration. Assuming initially that all the rj , j = 1, . . . , m, are distinct, we formally solve P u = 0 in C by ∞ x2 uj (x) = xsj exp irj + ηj x β−p,j x−p , 2 p=0

j = 1, . . . , m.

(2.3.2)

We may ﬁrst determine ηj and sj by computing x2 x2 − ηx P exp irj + ηx xs exp − irj 2 2 = g(η)xs+m−1 + f (s)xs+m−2 + O(xs+m−3 ). The function g(η) is linear in η. Namely, setting g(η) = 0 we obtain

η = ηj = −i

aαβ rjα . h=j (rj − rh )

$

α+β=m−1

The expression of f (s), involving aαβ with α + β ≥ m − 2, is linear in s and imposing f (s) = 0 we determine s = sj . Similarly we can ﬁnd β−p,j , assuming β0,j = 1. Note however that the series in (2.3.2) is not in general convergent, and the preceding expressions must be understood as asymptotic expansions of the actual solutions in suitable sectors of the complex plane. Namely, we recall the following basic result, see for example Wasow [194]. Proposition 2.3.1. Given any sector Λ = {x ∈ C \ {0} : ϕ1 < arg x < ϕ2 } with ϕ2 − ϕ1 < π2 , there exist uΛ,j (x), j = 1, . . . , m, x ∈ C, linearly independent solutions of P u = 0, such that for every n ≥ 0, x ∈ Λ, x → ∞: n x2 sj −p −n β−p,j x + o(x ) . (2.3.3) uΛ,j (x) = x exp irj + ηj x 2 p=0 In the case some rj coincide, we may replace (2.3.3) with the weaker information, valid for any linear combination of the corresponding independent solutions: x2 u ˜j (x), uΛ,j (x) = exp irj 2

2−

|˜ uj (x)| eν|x|

,

x ∈ Λ,

(2.3.4)

for some ν > 0, > 0. Observe that the solutions uΛ,j in (2.3.3), (2.3.4) depend on the sector Λ. Consider now two sectors Λ+ , Λ− satisfying the hypotheses of

84

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

Proposition 2.3.1 and containing R+ , R− , respectively. We may conclude the − existence of two systems of solutions, u+ j , uj , j = 1, . . . , m, satisfying (2.3.3) or (2.3.4) in Λ+ , Λ− . Any classical solution u of P u = 0 in R can be written u=

m

+ μ+ j uj =

j=1

m

− μ− j uj ,

− μ+ j , μj ∈ C.

j=1

Assume as in Theorem 2.2.2 that Im rj > 0 for j = 1, . . . , m+ , Im rj < 0 for j = m+ + 1, . . . , m, m = m+ + m− . Then from (2.3.3), (2.3.4) we have that − u belongs to S(R), or equivalently to S (R), if and only if μ+ j = μj = 0 for + m < j ≤ m. Summing up: +

If u ∈ S(R), then u =

m

+

+ μ+ j uj

=

j=1

m

− μ− j uj .

(2.3.5)

j=1

From (2.3.5), (2.3.3) and (2.3.4) we obtain the following results, which complete the information from Theorem 2.2.2. Theorem 2.3.2. Let u ∈ S (R), hence u ∈ S(R), be a solution of P u = 0. Then 2

|u(x)| e−δx ,

for x ∈ R

(2.3.6)

for some positive constant δ > 0. Moreover m+ − m− ≤ dim(Ker P ∩ S(R)) ≤ m+ .

(2.3.7)

In view of (2.3.3), (2.3.4) we may take in (2.3.6) any δ > 0 with δ<

min

j=1,...,m+

Im rj /2.

With respect to Theorem 2.2.2, the new information in (2.3.7) is that dim(Ker P ∩ S(R)) ≤ m+ . When m+ > 0, but ind P = m+ − m− ≤ 0, the existence of nontrivial solutions u ∈ S(R) of P u = 0 depends on the coeﬃcients aαβ in (2.3.1). We shall now prove that in the case m+ = 1 all the possible solutions in S(R) are of the form x2 (2.3.8) u(x) = Q(x)eir1 2 +η1 x , for some polynomials Q(x). This reduces the computation of the eigenvalues to a purely algebraic matter, and generalizes what we proved for the one-dimensional harmonic oscillator (2.2.19). Theorem 2.3.3. Consider P = (Dx − r1 x) . . . (Dx − rm x) +

α+β<m

aαβ xβ Dα

(2.3.9)

2.3. Asymptotic Integration and Solutions of Exponential Type

85

with Im r1 > 0, Im rj < 0 for j = 2, . . . , m, aαβ ∈ C. If u ∈ S(R) is a solution of P u = 0, then u is of exponential type, i.e., u has the form (2.3.8) where η1 = −i

aαβ r1α j=2 (r1 − rj )

$m

α+β=m−1

and Q(x) is a polynomial. In the proof we shall use the following classical Phragmen-Lindelöf result; see e.g. Titchmarsh [188, page 177]. Lemma 2.3.4. Let U (x), x ∈ C, be analytic for R ≤ |x| < ∞,

ϕ1 ≤ arg x ≤ ϕ2 ,

(2.3.10)

where R, ϕ1 , ϕ2 are real costants, R > 0. Let |U (x)| ≤ C exp[ν |x|η ]

(2.3.11)

in the same region, for some positive constants C, ν and η such that ϕ2 −ϕ1 < π/η. If U is bounded as x → ∞ on the lines arg x = ϕ1 and arg x = ϕ2 , then U is bounded uniformly in the region (2.3.10). Proof of Theorem 2.3.3. Let Λ1+ , Λ2+ , Λ1− , Λ2− , Λ+i , Λ−i be 6 sectors in C, with vertex at the origin and a positive central angle not exceeding π2 , such that Λ1+ ∪ Λ2+ ∪ Λ1− ∪ Λ2− ∪ Λ+i ∪ Λ−i = C \ {0}.

(2.3.12)

Moreover: Λ1+ and Λ2+ contain R+ ; Λ1− and Λ2− contain R− ; Λ+i contains iR+ ; Λ−i contains iR− . To be deﬁnite, let us deﬁne # " π Λ1+ = x ∈ C \ {0} : − < arg x < − 2 , 2 # " π 2 Λ+ = x ∈ C \ {0} : − + 2 < arg x < , 2 " # π π Λ+i = x ∈ C \ {0} : − 3 < arg x < + 3 , 2 2 and symmetrically Λ1− , Λ2− , Λ−i . Fix in particular 0 < < π/12. Let u ∈ S(R) be a solution of P u = 0. Then we may apply (2.3.5) with m+ = 1: + − − u(x) = μ+ 1 u1 (x) = μ1 u1 (x). More precisely, in the four sectors Λ1+ , Λ2+ , Λ1− , Λ2− , we have for u, up to multiplicative constants, the asymptotic expansion given by (2.3.3): n x2 s1 −p −n + η1 x β−p,1 x + o(x ) , (2.3.13) x exp ir1 2 p=0

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

86

with η1 as in Theorem 2.3.3. Take now an integer N such that N ≥ |s1 | and consider, for x ∈ C, x2 U (x) = x−N exp − ir1 − η1 x u(x) , (2.3.14) 2 which is an analytic function for x = 0. It follows from (2.3.13) that U (x) is bounded in Λ1+ ∪ Λ2+ ∪ Λ1− ∪ Λ2− , for |x| ≥ 1 say. We may actually prove that U is bounded in the whole C for |x| ≥ 1, by applying Lemma 2.3.4 to the remaining sectors Λ+i , Λ−i . Let us ﬁx attention on Λ+i , |x| ≥ 1. We know already that U (x) is bounded on the lines arg x = π2 − 3 , arg x = π2 + 3 , since they belong to Λ1+ , Λ1− , respectively. On the other hand, we may apply Proposition 2.3.1 and (2.3.4) to the sector Λ+i as well. Since u(x) is a linear combination of the corresponding functions in (2.3.3), (2.3.4) we have in Λ+i an estimate 2

|U (x)| ≤ C exp[ν |x| ], for suitable positive constants C and ν. Hence (2.3.11) is satisﬁed with η = 2. Since we assume 6 < π/2, we may apply Lemma 2.3.4 and conclude that U (x) is bounded in Λ+i , and similarly in Λ−i . In conclusion: U (x) in (2.3.14) is bounded in C for |x| ≥ 1, therefore the function x2 − η1 x u(x) = U (x)xN Q(x) = exp − ir1 2 is analytic in C with a pole at ∞; thus it is indeed a polynomial. For the sake of completeness, we report the classical proof. It is suﬃcient to show that (dn Q/dxn )(0) = 0 for n ≥ n0 , with n0 suﬃciently large. Now, by the Cauchy formula, dn Q (−1)n n! (0) = Q(z)z −n−1 dz dxn 2πi γ where γ is a closed path around the origin. Take n0 such that Q(z)z −n0 −1 ≤ −2

for large |z|. Then for any ﬁxed n ≥ n0 and every δ > 0, there exists C |z| R > 0 such that, by choosing γ = {x ∈ C : |x| = R}, we have |(dn Q/dxn )(0)| < δ. This ends the proof of Theorem 2.3.3. The preceding Theorem 2.3.3 can be extended to the case when in (2.2.13), (2.3.1) we have one root with positive imaginary part, appearing with multiplicity m+ ≥ 2. Let us write r1 = · · · = rm+ = r0 , Im r0 > 0. We need however some conditions on the lower order terms, which are expressed by imposing on the operator P the following particular form: ⎛ ⎞ + ⎝ P = cαβ xβ Dxα ⎠(Dx − r0 x)m −j 0≤j<m+

α+β=m− −j

+

α+β≤m− −m+

cαβ xβ Dxα ,

(2.3.15)

2.3. Asymptotic Integration and Solutions of Exponential Type where we understand 1 ≤ m+ ≤ m− and cαβ xβ ξ α = α+β=m−

(ξ − rj x)

87

(2.3.16)

m+ <j≤m

with Im rj < 0 for j = m+ + 1, . . . , m. In the case m+ = 1 we recapture the operator P in Theorem 2.3.3, with aαβ = 0 for α + β = m − 1, hence η1 = 0. Theorem 2.3.5. Consider P as in (2.3.15), (2.3.16) with 1 ≤ m+ ≤ m− , Im r0 > 0, Im rj < 0 for j = m+ + 1, . . . , m, cαβ ∈ C. If u ∈ S(R) is a solution of P u = 0, then x2 (2.3.17) u(x) = Q(x) exp ir0 2 for some polynomial Q(x). The rough estimate (2.3.4), valid in the case of multiple roots, is not suﬃcient for the proof of Theorem 2.3.5. Taking advantage of the particular form of P in (2.3.15), however, we have from the asymptotic integration the following more precise result. Lemma 2.3.6. Let P be as in Theorem 2.3.5. Given any sector Λ ⊂ C with vertex at the origin and a positive central angle not exceeding π/2, there exist uΛ,j (x), j = 1, . . . , m+ , linearly independent solutions of P u = 0, of the form x2 (2.3.18) u ˜j (x), j = 1, . . . , m+ uΛ,j (x) = exp ir0 2 where u ˜j (x) are entire functions, satisfying for some integer N : N

|˜ uj (x)| |x| ,

x ∈ Λ, |x| ≥ 1.

(2.3.19)

In fact, when integrating asymptotically P u = 0, we have x2 + − + − x2 exp − ir0 P exp ir0 xs = f (s)xs−m +m + O(xs−m +m −1 ), 2 2 where f (s) =

0≤j<m+

⎛ ⎝

⎞ cαβ r0α ⎠ s(s − 1) . . . (s − m+ + j + 1).

α+β=m− −j

This is a polynomial of degree m+ , corresponding to the multiplicity of the root r0 . That grants the lack of lower order exponential terms. Moreover, if the equation f (s) = 0 has m+ distinct roots s1 , . . . , sm+ , we have x2 uΛ,j (x) = xsj exp ir0 (1 + o(1)), j = 1, . . . , m+ . 2 When some sj coincide, logarithmic terms appear; the estimate (2.3.19) keeps valid anyhow for a suﬃciently large N .

88

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

Proof of Theorem 2.3.5. We cover C\{0} by six sectors as in (2.3.12). Let u ∈ S(R) be a solution of P u = 0. Then we may apply (2.3.5): +

u=

m

+

+ μ+ j uj

=

m

j=1

− μ− j uj .

j=1

More precisely, using Lemma 2.3.6 in the four sectors Λ1+ , Λ2+ , Λ1− , Λ2− , we have x2 u(x) = exp ir0 u ˜(x) 2 where the entire function u ˜(x) satisﬁes N

|˜ u(x)| |x| ,

x ∈ Λ1+ ∪ Λ2+ ∪ Λ1− ∪ Λ2− , |x| ≥ 1.

We may then argue exactly as in the proof of Theorem 2.3.3 and obtain (2.3.17).

2.4 H-Polynomials We pass now to consider Γρ -hypoelliptic partial diﬀerential operators, 0 < ρ ≤ 1, cf. Deﬁnition 2.1.15. In view of Proposition 2.2.1, we may again limit our attention to operators with polynomial coeﬃcients: P = cαβ xβ Dxα . (2.4.1) |α|+|β|≤m

Setting z = (x, ξ), we write their symbols in the standard quantization: cγ z γ . p(z) =

(2.4.2)

|γ|≤m

In the following we shall assume m ≥ 1 and cγ = 0 for some γ with |γ| = m. The Γρ -hypoellipticity is expressed by |∂zγ p(z)| |p(z)| z−ρ|γ| ,

|z| ≥ R

(2.4.3)

for some R > 0. In fact, condition (2.1.29) implies for a polynomial p(z) condition (2.1.28), since for some γ with |γ| = m we have ∂ γ p(z) =constant= 0, hence 0 < c = |∂ γ p(z)| |p(z)| z−ρm ,

|z| ≥ R,

and therefore |z|

ρm

|p(z)| ,

|z| ≥ R.

(2.4.4)

2.4. H-Polynomials

89

So, under the assumption (2.4.3) we may apply Theorem 2.1.16 and deduce existence of parametrices for P in (2.4.1). In particular, P is globally regular and the following a priori estimate is valid for u ∈ S(Rd ):

u HΓρm ≤ C ( P u L2 + u L2 ) .

(2.4.5)

In the sequel of this section we want to clarify the algebraic meaning of (2.4.3). We shall argue on polynomials in arbitrary dimension n though in our applications n = 2d is even. Consider the subset of Cn , V = {ζ ∈ Cn : p(ζ) = 0},

(2.4.6)

d(z) = distanceCn (z, V ) = inf |z − ζ| .

(2.4.7)

and deﬁne, for z ∈ Rn , ζ∈V

Proposition 2.4.1. The following properties are equivalent for a polynomial p(z): (i) ζ ∈ V , ζ → ∞ implies |Im ζ| → +∞. (ii) z ∈ Rn , z → ∞ implies d(z) → +∞. (iii) |∂zγ p(z)/p(z)| → 0 when z → ∞ in Rn , if γ = 0. If (i), (ii), (iii) are satisﬁed, we say that p(z) is H-type. Let ρ be ﬁxed, ρ > 0; we say that p(z) is ρ-H-type if the following equivalent properties are satisﬁed: (i)ρ We have:

|ζ|ρ 1 + |Im ζ|

for ζ ∈ V.

(ii)ρ There is a constant R > 0 such that ρ

|z| d(z)

for |z| ≥ R.

(iii)ρ There is a constant R > 0 such that |∂ γ p(z)| |p(z)| z−ρ|γ|

for |z| ≥ R,

i.e., p(z) is Γρ -hypoelliptic. Obviously, if p(z) is ρ-H-type for some ρ, 0 < ρ ≤ 1, then it is H-type. In the opposite direction, if p(z) is H-type, then it is ρ-H-type for some ρ > 0; moreover, the numbers ρ for which (i)ρ , (ii)ρ , (iii)ρ are valid form an interval ]0, ρ0 ], with ρ0 a rational number ≤ 1. To prove Proposition 2.4.1 we need two auxiliary results.

90

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

Lemma 2.4.2. Let m ≥ 1 be an integer. There is a constant C > 0, depending only on m and the dimension n, such that for all polynomials p(z) of degree m we have 1/|γ| |∂ γ p(z)/p(z)| ≤ C, (2.4.8) C −1 ≤ d(z) |γ|=0

for z ∈ Rn , p(z) = 0. Proof. Setting, for p(z) = 0, A(z) =

1/|γ|

|∂ γ p(z)/p(z)|

,

|γ|=0

we have

|∂ γ p(z)| ≤ A(z)|γ| |p(z)| .

From the Taylor expansion we obtain, for ζ ∈ Cn , (A(z) |ζ|)|γ| /γ!. |p(z + ζ) − p(z)| ≤ |p(z)| 1≤|γ|≤m

Choose c > 0 such that

c|γ| /γ! ≤ 1.

1≤|γ|≤m

If A(z) |ζ| < c we must have p(z + ζ) = 0 and therefore A(z)d(z) ≥ c. We obtain thus the left-hand side inequality in (2.4.8) for any C ≥ 1/c. To establish the right-hand side inequality, choose ζ ∈ Cn such that |ζ| ≤ d(z)/2 and regard p(z + tζ) as a polynomial Q(t) in t. The roots tj of Q(t) satisfy the inequality |tj ζ| ≥ d(z), and therefore |tj | ≥ 2. It follows that m (tj − 1)/tj ≤ (3/2)m . |p(z + ζ)/p(z)| = |Q(1)/Q(0)| =

(2.4.9)

j=1

Regarding p(z + ζ) as a holomorphic function of ζ ∈ Cn and applying Cauchy’s inequality on a polycylinder in the ball |ζ| ≤ d(z)/2, we obtain from (2.4.9) |∂ γ p(z)| ≤ Cd(z)−|γ| |p(z)| , for a suitable C depending only on m and n, which implies the right-hand side inequality of (2.4.8). The second auxiliary result is the following version of the classical SeidenbergTarski Theorem. For the proof see for example Hörmander [119, Vol. II]. Theorem 2.4.3. If A, subset of Rn+m = Rn ⊕ Rm , is semi-algebraic (i.e., ﬁnite union of ﬁnite intersections of sets deﬁned by a polynomial equation or inequality), then the projection of A in Rm is also semi-algebraic.

2.4. H-Polynomials

91

Proof of Proposition 2.4.1. The equivalence between (i) and (ii) is easily established, while the equivalence between (ii) and (iii) is a consequence of Lemma 2.4.2. Let us detail the proof of (i)ρ ⇔ (ii)ρ . Observe ﬁrst that (ii)ρ cannot be valid for ρ > 1. Indeed, the function d(z) is Lipschitz, therefore d(z) ≤ C(1 + |z|), for some C > 0. This forces ρ ≤ 1 in (ii)ρ . It is now clear that (ii)ρ implies (i)ρ ; in fact we have for ζ ∈ V : ρ

|Re ζ| ≤ C(1 + d(Re ζ)) ≤ C(1 + |Im ζ|). On the other hand, if (i)ρ holds we can take ζ ∈ V with |ζ − z| ≤ 2d(z), say, and write |z| ≤ |ζ| + |z − ζ| ≤ C 1/ρ (1 + |Im ζ|)1/ρ + 2d(z); since |Im ζ| ≤ 2d(z), we obtain (ii)ρ . The equivalence between (ii)ρ and (iii)ρ follows easily from Lemma 2.4.2. Finally, let us prove that (ii) implies (ii)ρ for some ρ > 0. Let us begin by considering the set A of points (z, η, θ, τ, δ) ∈ Rn × Rn × n R × R × R deﬁned by the following equations and inequalities: p(η + iθ) = 0,

τ > 0,

|z − η|2 + |θ|2 ≤ τ −2 ,

δ > 0,

|z| δ = 1.

By Theorem 2.4.3 the image B of A by the projection (z, η, θ, τ, δ) → (z, τ, δ) is also semi-algebraic. It is easily seen that B is deﬁned by the inequalities τ > 0,

d(z) ≤ τ −1 ,

δ > 0,

|z| δ = 1.

If (ii) holds, there is δ0 > 0 such that if 0 < δ < δ0 and |z| = δ −1 we have d(z) > 0. For all such δ the function τ (δ) = sup d(z)−1 |z|δ=1

is well deﬁned and continuous. The image E of B by the projection (z, τ, δ) → (τ, δ) is a semi-algebraic set. Moreover, we can show that (τ (δ), δ) varies on the boundary of E when 0 < δ < δ0 . Shrinking this interval, if necessary, it follows that Q(τ (δ), δ) = 0 for a suitable polynomial Q in two variables. Then, τ (δ) admits a Puiseux expansion in some neighbourhood of the origin in the complex δ-plane: τ (δ) = ak (δ 1/q )k + ak+1 (δ 1/q )k+1 + . . . , where q > 0 and k are integers. We can assume ak = 0 and, by choosing for δ 1/q the branch which is real and positive for δ > 0, also ak > 0. In view of (ii), we

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

92

have τ (δ) → 0 as δ → 0, hence k > 0. It follows easily that, for some c > 0 and suﬃciently large |z|, inf d(z) = τ (δ)−1 ≥ c |z|k/q . |z|δ=1

This implies (ii)ρ with ρ = k/q and also the fact that the set of numbers for which (ii)ρ holds is a closed interval with a rational number as upper limit. The proof of Proposition 2.4.1 is therefore complete. As we show now, to prove that p(z) is H-type, it is suﬃcient to check (iii) in Proposition 2.4.1 for ﬁrst order derivatives. This simpliﬁes a lot the reasoning in the applications. Proposition 2.4.4. The following properties of the polynomial p(z) are equivalent (and provide Γρ -hypoellipticity of p(z) for some ρ, 0 < ρ ≤ 1): (a) ∂zγ p(z)/p(z) → 0 when z → ∞ in Rn , if γ = 0. (b) For all θ ∈ Rn , p(z + θ)/p(z) → 1 when z → ∞ in Rn . (c) ∂zj p(z)/p(z) → 0 when z → ∞ in Rn , for j = 1, . . . , n. We need the following lemma, which allows us to write each γ-derivative of a polynomial p(z) as a linear combination of translations of p(z). Lemma 2.4.5. Let p(z) = |γ|≤m cγ z γ , z ∈ Rn , be a polynomial of degree m ≥ 0, m+n and N = n . Then for all (θ1 , θ2 , . . . , θN ) in an open dense subset of (Rn )N and all γ ∈ Nn there exist real numbers t1 , t2 , . . . , tN , such that ∂ γ p(z) = and satisfying further

N

k=1 tk

N

tk p(z + θk ),

(2.4.10)

k=1

= 0 if γ = 0.

Proof. For all k = 1, . . . , N , let θk ∈ Rn . Consider Taylor’s formula for p(z + θk ): p(z + θk ) = p(z) +

∂ β p(z) β θk , β!

β=0

and multiply the left-hand and right-hand sides by a real variable tk . Summing up on k from 1 to N we obtain N k=1

tk p(z + θk ) = p(z)

N k=1

tk +

N ∂ β p(z) tk θkβ . β!

β=0

(2.4.11)

k=1

In order to get (2.4.10) when γ = 0, it suﬃces that the following inhomogeneous linear system is solvable: ⎧N ⎪ ⎨k=1 tk = 0, N γ (2.4.12) k=1 tk θk = γ!, ⎪ ⎩N β k=1 tk θk = 0 for β = γ, β = 0.

2.4. H-Polynomials

93

This is an N × N system, cf. (0.3.15), whose coeﬃcients matrix is A = (θkβ ), k = 1, . . . , N , |β| ≤ m. Here the column index is k, whereas β plays the role of row index and it is understood that the set of these multi-indices is ordered in some way. Now, the determinant of A is a polynomial in the components of each because, up to θk , k = 1, . . . , N . It also clear that it does not vanish identically σN the sign, it is given by (σ1 ,...,σN ) sign(σ1 , . . . , σN )θ1σ1 · · · θN , where (σ1 , . . . , σN ) is a permutation of {β ∈ Nn : |β| ≤ m}, and there are no similar terms in this sum. Hence the above system is solvable for every choice of θ1 , . . . , θN for which such a determinant does not vanish, which gives an open dense subset of (Rn )N . N Similarly, for γ = 0 one considers, in place of (2.4.12), the system k=1 tk = N 1 and k=1 tk θkβ = 0 for all β = 0, which concludes the proof. Proof of Proposition 2.4.4. Of course (a) ⇒ (c). We just observe that by Proposition 2.4.1 and (2.4.4) it follows from (a) that p(z) → ∞ as z → ∞. (c) ⇒ (b) Let n ≥ 3. Since p(z) = 0 on the simply connected open set |z| > R, for R large enough, we can consider a branch of log p(z), for |z| > R. For any ﬁxed θ = (b1 , b2 , . . . , bn ) ∈ Rn we can write log p(z + θ) − log p(z) =

1

0

d log p(z + tθ) dt, dt

for |z| > R + |θ|. We have n ∂zj p(z + tθ) d n ∂zj p(z + tθ) log p(z + tθ) = |bj |, bj ≤ dt j=1 p(z + tθ) j=1 p(z + tθ) and it follows from (c) that p(z + θ) →1 p(z)

as z → ∞.

In the cases n = 1, 2 one can repeat the above argument separately on two simply connected open subsets which cover R and R2 , respectively. (b) ⇒ (a) From Lemma 2.4.5 it follows that for each γ ∈ Nn , γ = 0, there exist real numbers t1 , . . . , tN and vectors θ1 , . . . , θN in Rn , N = m+n , such that n ∂ γ p(z) =

N

tk p(z + θk ),

with

k=1

N

tk = 0.

k=1

For large |z| and γ = 0 we obtain ∂ γ p(z) p(z + θk ) tk tk = 0, = → p(z) p(z) N

N

k=1

k=1

as z → ∞.

94

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

2.5 Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials We may now discuss some relevant subclasses of the H-polynomials, namely the quasi-elliptic ones and, as a generalization in the next section, the multi-quasielliptic polynomials. Such polynomials, regarded as symbols of linear partial differential operators, are obviously Γρ -hypoelliptic for some ρ > 0, cf. (2.4.3). Their importance, however, resides in the fact that we may easily restore for them a notion of ellipticity, cf. Deﬁnition 1.3.1, by introducing adapted weight functions. In the present and next sections we ﬁx attention on the algebraic aspects, and address to the next Section 2.7 for the related pseudo-diﬀerential calculus. We ﬁrst deﬁne the quasi-elliptic polynomials. Let M = (M1 , . . . , Mn ) be an n-tuple of rational numbers Mj ≥ 1, j = 1, . . . , n. Assume also minj Mj = 1. Every polynomial p(z) in Rn can be written cγ z γ , (2.5.1) p(z) = γ,M ≤m

for a suﬃciently large integer m, the M -order of p(z). In the sum we mean γ, M = γ1 M1 + · · · + γn Mn . The quasi-principal part of p(z), with respect to M , will be then deﬁned as pM,m (z) = cγ z γ . (2.5.2) γ,M =m

Deﬁnition 2.5.1. We shall say that the polynomial p(z) in (2.5.1) is quasi-elliptic with respect to M if pM,m (z) = 0 for all z = 0. (2.5.3) If M = (1, . . . , 1), then pM,m (z) in (2.5.2) is pm (z), the standard principal part of p(z), and (2.5.3) means that p(z) is Γ-elliptic, cf. (2.2.5), (2.2.6). Let us recall that a function f (z) in Rn \ {0} is called quasi-homogeneous of degree k ∈ R, with respect to M , if for all t > 0, z = 0.

f (tM1 z1 , . . . , tMn zn ) = tk f (z1 , . . . , zn )

Observe that if f is quasi-homogeneous of degree k, then ∂ γ f is quasi-homogeneous of degree k −γ, M . According to the previous deﬁnition, the quasi-principal part pM,m (z) in (2.5.2) is quasi-homogeneous of degree m with respect to M . Let us deﬁne, for z ∈ Rn , |z|M =

n

|zj |

1/Mj

.

(2.5.4)

j=1

The function |z|M is quasi-homogeneous of degree 1. Any quasi-homogeneous function f (z) of degree k is identiﬁed by its values on the compact manifold {|z|M = 1}; namely we may write k z) (2.5.5) f (z) = |z|M f (˜

2.5. Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials

95

where

M

M

z˜ = (z1 / |z|M1 , . . . , zn / |z|Mn ), hence |˜ z |M = 1. If f (z) is continuous in Rn \ {0}, it follows that k

|f (z)| ≤ C |z|M

(2.5.6)

with C = max|z|M =1 |f (z)|. If in addition f (z) = 0, then |z|M ≤ −1 |f (z)| k

(2.5.7)

with = min|z|M =1 |f (z)|. Since p(z) in (2.5.1) can be regarded as a sum of quasi-homogeneous terms of degree ≤ m, we deduce from (2.5.6) that, for every R > 0, m

|z| ≥ R.

|p(z)| |z|M ,

(2.5.8)

On the other hand, using (2.5.7) and arguing as in the proof of Proposition 2.1.5 we have: Proposition 2.5.2. The polynomial p(z) in (2.5.1) is quasi-elliptic with respect to M if and only if there exists R > 0 such that |z|m M |p(z)| ,

|z| ≥ R,

(2.5.9)

where m is the M -order of p(z). Summing up, we have that quasi-elliptic polynomials p(z), of order m with m respect to M , are characterized by the asymptotic equivalence |p(z)| |z|M . We can now prove that quasi-elliptic polynomials are H-type. Proposition 2.5.3. Let p(z) in (2.5.1) be quasi-elliptic with respect to M . Then −|γ|

|∂zγ p(z)| |p(z)| |z|M

|z| ≥ R,

,

(2.5.10)

for some R > 0, and p(z) is ρ-H-type for ρ = min 1/Mj .

(2.5.11)

j

Proof. Since p(z) in (2.5.1) can be written as a sum of quasi-homogeneous terms of degree ≤ m, then ∂ γ p(z) is a sum of quasi-homogeneous terms of degree ≤ m − γ, M . It follows from the estimates (2.5.6) that m−γ,M

|∂zγ p(z)| |z|M

|z| ≥ R.

,

Hence by applying (2.5.9), −γ,M

|∂zγ p(z)| |p(z)| |z|M

,

|z| ≥ R,

(2.5.12)

96

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

which implies (2.5.10) since γ, M ≥ |γ|. On the other hand, we have zρ |z|M for ρ as in (2.5.11) and large |z|; therefore |∂zγ p(z)| |p(z)| z−ρ|γ| ,

|z| ≥ R,

i.e., p(z) is ρ-H-type. Example 2.5.4. Let us return to split z = (x, ξ) and consider, for x ∈ R, ξ ∈ R, p(x, ξ) = ξ h + rxk ,

(2.5.13)

where h, k are positive integers and r ∈ C. The associated ordinary diﬀerential operator is P = Dxh + rxk . (2.5.14) If k ≥ h, we ﬁx the weight 1 for the x variable and the weight k/h for the ξ variable, i.e., M = (1, k/h). If h ≥ k, then M = (h/k, 1). The M -order of p(x, ξ) in (2.5.13) is max{h, k} and, in view of (2.5.3), quasi-ellipticity amounts to assuming ξ h + rxk = 0 for (x, ξ) = (0, 0). In particular, if h or k is odd, p(x, ξ) is quasi-elliptic if and only if Im r = 0. Example 2.5.5. For z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d consider p(x, ξ) = |ξ|2 + V (x) where V (x) =

a β xβ ,

(2.5.15) (2.5.16)

|β|≤2k

for some integer k ≥ 1. Assume V2k (x) =

aβ xβ = 0 for x = 0.

(2.5.17)

|β|=2k

The associated operator is P = − + V (x).

(2.5.18)

We give now the weight 1 to the x variables and the weight k to the ξ variables, i.e., M = (1, . . . , 1, k, . . . , k). Then p(x, ξ) in (2.5.15), (2.5.16), (2.5.17) is quasi2 elliptic if and only if |ξ| + V2k (x) = 0 for (x, ξ) = (0, 0), that is V2k (x) does not take values in R− ∪ {0} for x = 0. Remark 2.5.6. In the estimates (2.5.8), (2.5.9), (2.5.10), the function |z|M can be replaced by any asymptotically equivalent function. Observe in particular that ⎞1/2 ⎛ n 2m/M m j⎠ ⎝1 + zj |z|M |p(z)| , |z| ≥ R. (2.5.19) j=1

Note that m/Mj , j = 1, . . . , n, are integers; in fact, the quasi-ellipticity assumption m/Mj , j = 1, . . . , n, in the expression (2.5.3) forces the presence of the monomials zj of p(z).

2.6. Multi-Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials

97

2.6 Multi-Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials We now extend the arguments of the preceding section. Namely, we try to reproduce the estimates (2.5.8), (2.5.9), (2.5.10) by replacing the function |z|m M |p(z)| with weight functions suited to more general H-polynomials. In particular, looking m to the weight in the left-hand side of (2.5.19), asymptotically 2γ 1/2 equivalent to |z|M , one is led in a natural way to consider the function ( γ z ) , where γ runs over indices appearing in the expression of p(z). To be precise, we begin by deﬁning the Newton polyhedron of a polynomial p(z), and then recalling terminology and notation from the general theory of the convex polyhedra. Deﬁnition 2.6.1. The Newton polyhedron P of a polynomial p(z) = cγ z γ , z ∈ Rn , |γ|≤m

is the convex hull of A ∪ {0} with A = {γ ∈ Nn : cγ = 0}.

(2.6.1)

We recall that, in general, a convex polyhedron P ⊂ Rn is deﬁned as the convex hull of a ﬁnite set of points in Rn . One can show that P can be obtained as the convex hull of a ﬁnite subset V (P) ⊂ Rn of convex-linearly independent points, called the vertices of P and univocally determinated by P. Moreover there exists a ﬁnite set of normal vectors N (P) = N0 (P) ∪ N1 (P) ⊂ Rn such that |ν| = 1,

for all ν ∈ N0 (P),

P = {z ∈ Rn : ν · z ≥ 0, ∀ν ∈ N0 (P)} ∩ {z ∈ Rn : ν · z ≤ 1, ∀ν ∈ N1 (P)}. N0 (P) and N1 (P) are univocally determined by P, if P has non-empty interior. The boundary of P is made of faces Fν which are the convex hull of the vertices of P lying on the hyperplane Hν orthogonal to ν ∈ N (P) and of equation ν · z = 0, ν · z = 1,

if ν ∈ N0 (P), if ν ∈ N1 (P).

If P ⊂ (R+ ∪ {0})n and V (P) ⊂ Nn , as we have for the Newton polyhedron of a polynomial, we deﬁne ΛP (z) =

1/2 z

2γ

,

z ∈ Rn .

(2.6.2)

γ∈V (P)

Deﬁnition 2.6.2. A complete polyhedron is a convex polyhedron P ⊂ (R+ ∪ {0})n such that (1) V (P) ⊂ Nn ;

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

98

(2) (0, . . . , 0) ∈ V (P); (3) V (P) = {(0, . . . , 0)}; (4) N0 (P) = {e1 , . . . , en }, with ej = (0, . . . , 0,

1

, 0, . . . , 0) ∈ Rn for j =

j−th entry

1, . . . , n;

(5) N1 (P) ⊂ Rn+ , i.e., every ν ∈ N1 (P) has strictly positive components νj , j = 1, . . . , n. One easily proves: zμ0 ΛP (z) zμ1

for all z ∈ Rn ,

with μ0 =

min

γ∈V (P)\{0}

|γ|,

μ1 = max |γ| = max |γ| . γ∈V (P)

γ∈P

(2.6.3)

μ0 and μ1 are called the minimum and the maximum order of P. We also introduce the formal order of P: μ = max

# "1 : j = 1, . . . , n, ν ∈ N1 (P) . νj

(2.6.4)

We have 0 < μ0 ≤ μ1 ≤ μ. Theorem 2.6.3. The Newton polyhedron of an H-type polynomial is complete. Proof. Let p(z) satisfy the equivalent properties (i), (ii), (iii) in Proposition 2.4.1. Let us prove by induction on n ≥ 2 that its Newton polyhedron P is complete. If n = 2 let l s bj (z1 )z2j p(z) = j=1

with s1 < s2 < . . . < sl . By (iii) in Proposition 2.4.1 we have that ∂z1 p(z) → 0, p(z)

as z → ∞.

In particular we have that ∂z1 p(z) ∂z1 bl (z1 ) = lim = 0. z2 →∞ p(z) bl (z1 ) It follows that sl > 0 and that bl (z1 ) does not depend on z1 . Therefore P contains the point (0, sl ) and all other points (q1 , q2 ) ∈ P are such that q2 < sl . In a similar way we have that there exists (r, 0) ∈ P, with r > 0, such that q1 < r for all other points (q1 , q2 ) ∈ P. The completeness of P follows now easily from the convexity of P.

2.6. Multi-Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials

99

Let us now assume that the theorem is true in dimension n ≥ 2 and let us prove it in dimension n + 1. Let us ﬁrst show that there are no faces passing through the origin and not lying on the coordinate hyperplanes. In fact if Fν is such a face, ν should have at least two components, say, νq and νn+1 diﬀerent from zero and at least one, say νq , negative. The reason is that Fν intersects (R+ )n+1 . The intersection of Fν with the coordinate hyperplane −1 zn+1 = 0 is the face Fσ with σ = |ν | ν and ν = (ν , νn+1 ), of the Newton polyhedron of p(z , 0) with z = (z , zn+1 ). It is obvious that p(z , 0) is H–type, so by induction σ should not have negative components, in contrast to the fact that −1 σq = |ν | νq < 0. This shows that there are no faces through the origin that do not lie on the coordinate hyperplanes. Now we prove that ν ∈ Rn+1 for all ν ∈ N1 (P) such that Fν intersects a + coordinate hyperplane, say zn+1 = 0. Set z = (z , zn+1 ) and ν = (ν , νn+1 ) and observe that p(z , 0) is H-type and the intersection of Fν with the hyperplane zn+1 = 0 is the face Fν of the Newton polyhedron of p(z , 0) with normal ν . By induction we have that ν ∈ Rn+ . So we have to prove that νn+1 > 0. Let p(z) =

m

j bj (z )zn+1

r

j=1

with r1 < r2 < . . . < rm . It is clear that the exponents of the monomials z α in b1 (z ) are such that α · ν ≤ 1 and that if α belongs to Fν , then α · ν = 1. Hence r1 = 0. Moreover, if γ is in Fν ∩ Nn+1 with γn+1 > 0, then there exists rj = γn+1 rj and γ is the exponent of a monomial in bj (z ). Now rj !bj (z ) = ∂zn+1 p(z , 0), thus by (iii) in Proposition 2.4.1 we have that bj (z )/b1 (z ) → 0 as z → ∞. In particular, if we set z = (a1 tν1 , . . . , an tνn ) and let t → ∞ for diﬀerent choices of a1 , . . . , an , we obtain that γ · ν < 1. But then 1 = γ · ν = γ · ν + γn+1 νn+1 implies that νn+1 > 0. Finally we prove that ν ∈ Rn+1 for all ν ∈ N1 (P). In fact if this were + not the case, we would have that there exists ν ∈ N1 (P) with a non-positive component, say, νn+1 ≤ 0. Let w = (w , wn+1 ) be an internal point to Fν . Let Fσ , σ = (σ , σn+1 ), be any face intersecting the coordinate hyperplane zn+1 = 0. We must have w · σ ≤ 1 because w ∈ P and, because σn+1 > 0 by what we have just proved, we have w · σ < 1. So (w , 0) is internal to the intersection of P with the hyperplane zn+1 = 0 and hence, in particular, we must have w · ν < 1, but this is impossible because w · ν = 1 − wn+1 νn+1 ≥ 1, since νn+1 ≤ 0. Remark 2.6.4. The Newton polyhedron P may be complete without p(z) being Htype. For example p(x, ξ) = (x−ξ)2 , z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2 , is not H-type but its Newton polyhedron is the triangle with vertices (2, 0), (0, 2), (0, 0), which is complete. Example 2.6.5. As in the preceding Section 2.5 consider cγ z γ . p(z) = γ,M ≤m

100

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials m/M

j If we assume quasi-ellipticity, the terms zj appear in the expression, with non-zero coeﬃcients, cf. Remark 2.5.6. Hence the Newton polyhedron is given by

n # " Mj zj /m ≤ 1 , P = z ∈ Rn : z ≥ 0, j=1

which is complete, according to the previous Theorem 2.6.3, with vertices V (P) = {0, me1 /M1 , . . . , men /Mn }. We have μ0 = min{m/Mj }, μ1 = μ = m. The function ΛP (z) is given by 1+

n

2m/Mj

1/2

zj

m

|z|M

j=1

for large |z|, cf. Remark 2.5.6. The Γ-elliptic case, considered in Section 2.2, corresponds to taking M1 = . . . = Mn = 1 in the preceding formulas. Theorem 2.6.6. Let p(z) be a polynomial and let P be its Newton polyhedron. Deﬁne as in (2.6.2) 1/2 2γ ΛP (z) = z . γ∈V (P)

Then we have |p(z)| ΛP (z),

z ∈ Rn .

(2.6.5)

The proof is not so obvious as for (2.5.8), because of the lack of the quasihomogeneous structure. We need the following lemma. Lemma 2.6.7. Given z ∈ (R+ ∪ {0})n , a ﬁnite subset A ⊂ (R+ ∪ {0})n and a convex linear combination β = α∈A cα α, we have zβ ≤

cα z α .

(2.6.6)

α∈A

Proof. We argue by induction on the number N of the elements of A. If N = 1, the estimate (2.6.6) is obvious. If N > 1, choosing any γ ∈ A, let A = A \ {γ}. If cγ = 1, then cα = 0 for all α ∈ A and there is nothing to prove. If cγ < 1, then c = α∈A cα > 0. If we set γ = c1 α∈A cα α, we have β = c γ + (1 − c )γ. Let us consider the function f (t) = z tγ

+(1−t)γ

t = z γ (z γ )1−t .

We have that f ≥ 0, so that f is convex and

z β ≤ c z γ + (1 − c )z γ = c z γ + cγ z γ .

2.6. Multi-Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials

101

On the other hand, by the inductive hypothesis, we have zγ ≤ cα z α α∈A

with cα = cα /c . Therefore z β ≤ c

cα z α + cγ z γ =

α∈A

cα z α .

α∈A

Proof of Theorem 2.6.6. Observe ﬁrst that |z γ | . ΛP (z)

(2.6.7)

γ∈V (P)

To prove (2.6.5), it will be suﬃcient to estimate every term of the type z β with Newton polyhedron P. Such β can be regarded as a convex β ∈ Nn belonging to the linear combination β = α∈A cα α with A = V (P). Hence applying Lemma 2.6.7 we obtain β z |z γ | . γ∈V (P)

In view of (2.6.7), this concludes the proof of Theorem 2.6.6

Having as model (2.5.9) in Proposition 2.5.2, we now deﬁne the multi-quasielliptic polynomials. Deﬁnition 2.6.8. We say that the polynomial p(z) is multi-quasi-elliptic if the corresponding Newton polyhedron is complete and for some R > 0: ΛP (z) |p(z)| ,

|z| ≥ R.

(2.6.8)

Theorem 2.6.9. Let p(z) be multi-quasi-elliptic. Then |∂zγ p(z)| |p(z)| ΛP (z)−|γ|/μ ,

|z| ≥ R,

(2.6.9)

for some R > 0, and p(z) is ρ-H–type for ρ = μ0 /μ

(2.6.10)

where μ0 and μ are the minimum and the formal order of P, cf. (2.6.3), (2.6.4). Proof. Let us show that, for each β ∈ Nn , β ∂ p(z) ΛP (z)1−|β|/μ ,

for all z ∈ Rn .

(2.6.11)

Let γ ∈ A with A given by (2.6.1), and consider β ∈ Nn . We have to prove that β γ ∂ z ΛP (z)1−|β|/μ .

102

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

If we do not have β ≤ γ, then ∂ β z γ = 0 and there is nothing to prove. Since μ ≥ μ1 ≥ |γ|, cf. (2.6.3), the conclusion is obvious also for β = γ. Assume that β < γ. Then for each ν ∈ N1 (P) we have 0 < (γ − β) · ν ≤ 1 − β · ν ≤ 1 − Hence

μ (γ − β) ∈ P μ − |β|

and, by Lemma 2.6.7, which gives

|β| . μ

μ γ−β μ−|β| z ΛP (z),

|∂ β z γ | ΛP (z)1−|β|/μ .

This completes the proof of (2.6.11). Using the multi-quasi-ellipticity assumption, from (2.6.11) we obtain (2.6.9). Finally, since zμ0 ΛP (z), we have from (2.6.9), |∂ γ p(z)| |p(z)| z−|γ|μ0 /μ ,

(2.6.12)

i.e., p(z) is ρ-H-type with ρ as in (2.6.10).

Example 2.6.10. Quasi-elliptic polynomials are multi-quasi-elliptic, since the estimate (2.5.9) is equivalent to (2.6.8), cf. (2.5.19) and Example 2.6.5. A simple example of multi-quasi-elliptic polynomial, which is not quasi-elliptic, is given for z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2 by ξ h1 + xk2 ξ h2 + xk1 , (2.6.13) where hj , kj , j = 1, 2, are positive integers, h1 > h2 , k1 > k2 , and The associated ordinary diﬀerential operator is P = Dxh1 + xk2 Dxh2 + xk1 .

k2 k1

+

h2 h1

> 1.

(2.6.14)

The Newton polyhedron is given by P = {(x, ξ) ∈ R2 : x ≥ 0, ξ ≥ 0,

x (k1 − k2 ) (h1 − h2 ) ξ + ξ ≤ 1, x+ ≤ 1}, k1 h2 k1 k2 h 1 h1 (2.6.15)

which is complete, with vertices V (P) = {(0, 0), (k1 , 0), (0, h1 ), (h2 , k2 )}. We have μ0 = min{h1 , k1 }, μ1 = h2 + k2 , h 2 k1 k2 h1 μ = max . , k1 − k2 h1 − h2

(2.6.16)

(2.6.17)

2.6. Multi-Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials

103

If we assume that hj , kj , j = 1, 2, are even, we have ΛP (x, ξ) ξ h1 + xk2 ξ h2 + xk1 ,

|x| + |ξ| ≥ R,

(2.6.18)

for every R > 0, and the polynomial in (2.6.13) is obviously multi-quasi-elliptic. An alternative deﬁnition of multi-quasi-ellipticity is given by the following proposition. Proposition 2.6.11. The polynomial p(z) is multi-quasi-elliptic if and only if the corresponding Newton polyhedron P is complete and there exists R > 0 such that ΛP (z) |pP,μ (z)| ,

|z| ≥ R,

(2.6.19)

where pP,μ (z), for short pμ (z) in the following, is the P-principal part of p(z): pμ (z) =

cγ z γ

(2.6.20)

Fν (P).

(2.6.21)

γ∈F (P)

with

F (P) =

ν∈N1 (P)

We recall that μ denotes the formal order of P and for ν ∈ N1 (P) we have Fν (P) = {z ∈ P : ν · z = 1}. We need the following lemma, whose proof is an obvious application of Lemma 2.6.7. Lemma 2.6.12. For every γ ∈ (R+ ∪ {0})n , in particular for all γ ∈ Nn , we have |z γ | ΛP (z)k(P,γ) where

(2.6.22)

k(P, γ) = inf{t > 0, t−1 γ ∈ P} = max ν · γ. ν∈N1 (P)

Proof of Proposition 2.6.11. We split p(z) = pμ (z) + p˜(z) with

p˜(z) =

cγ z γ .

γ∈P\F (P)

From Lemma 2.6.12 we have for some C > 0 |˜ p(z)| ≤ CΛP (z)δ ,

z ∈ Rn ,

with δ=

max

γ∈P\F (P)

k(P, γ) < 1,

(2.6.23)

104

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

in view of (2.6.20), (2.6.21) and (2.6.22), (2.6.23). For any ﬁxed > 0, we then obtain in the region |z| ≥ R: |p(z) − pμ (z)| = |˜ p(z)| ≤ ΛP (z) provided R is so large that ΛP (z)δ−1 ≤ C −1 in the same region. Taking suﬃciently small , we get the equivalence of (2.6.19) and (2.6.8). Hence Proposition 2.6.11 is proved. We may now explain the name “multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials” attributed to polynomials satisfying (2.6.19), i.e., (2.6.8). Proposition 2.6.13. Let p(z) be a polynomial of the variable z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2 . Assume p(z) is multi-quasi-elliptic, with complete Newton polyhedron P. Then we can always ﬁnd a product of quasi-elliptic polynomials of type (2.5.13), whose P-principal part coincides with that of p(x, ξ); precisely:

p(x, ξ) = c0 (ξ h1 + r1 xk1 ) · · · (ξ hM + rM xkM ) +

cαβ xβ ξ α ,

(2.6.24)

(β,α)∈P\F (P)

for suitable positive integers hj , kj prime to each other and complex constants c0 , rj , cαβ , with c0 = 0, Im rj = 0 for j = 1, . . . , M . Correspondently, P can be decomposed into an algebraic sum of triangles: P = Ph1 ,k1 + . . . + PhM ,kM ,

(2.6.25)

where Phj ,kj has vertices {(0, 0), (0, hj ), (kj , 0), j = 1, . . . , M }. Proof. To prove (2.6.24), (2.6.25) we consider the principal part pμ of p, by ordering (β, α) ∈ F (P): M ai xβi ξ αi pμ (x, ξ) = i=0

so that αM > αM −1 > . . . > α0 = 0, 0 = βM < βM −1 < . . . < β0 . Note that a0 = 0, aM = 0. We begin to determine the integers h, k, with no common factor, and t ≥ 1 by means of the conditions k = |βM − βM −1 | = . . . = |βM −t+1 − βM −t | , h = αM − αM −1 = . . . = αM −t+1 − αM −t , k = |βM −t − βM −t−1 | or else h = αM −t − αM −t−1 . We can then write pμ (x, ξ) = q(x, ξ)(ξ h + rxk ) +

(β,α)∈P\F (P)

c˜β xβ ξ α ,

2.6. Multi-Quasi-Elliptic Polynomials with q(x, ξ) =

M −1

105

bi xβi ξ αi −h ,

i=0

where r, bi ∈ C are obtained by solving the system ⎧ aM = rbM −1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ a M −1 = bM −1 + rbM −2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ··· ⎨ aM −t+1 = bM −t+1 + rbM −t ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ aM −t = bM −t ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ··· ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ a0 = b0 and c˜αβ are suitable complex constants. Writing respectively Q and Ph,k for the Newton polyhedron of q(x, ξ) and ξ h + rxk , we have P = Q + Ph,k . It is easy to see that the multi-quasi-ellipticity of p implies the multi-quasi ellipticity of q and ξ h + rxk , which in turn forces Im r = 0, cf. Example 2.5.4. Iterating the procedure, we get (2.6.24), (2.6.25). Example 2.6.14. In Rn , n > 2, there exist multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials which cannot be factorized in terms of quasi-elliptic polynomials. Consider for example in R4 , with z = (x1 , x2 , ξ1 , ξ2 ), p(x, ξ) = ξ12 + ξ22 + V (x1 , x2 ),

(2.6.26)

corresponding to the operator in R2 , − + V (x1 , x2 ).

(2.6.27)

Let us assume that the potential V is of the form (2.6.13) with respect to the variables x1 , x2 , say to be deﬁnite V (x1 , x2 ) = x61 + x41 x42 + x62 .

(2.6.28)

Then p(x, ξ) in (2.6.26) is multi-quasi-elliptic, but it cannot be factorized as before. Finally, we observe that multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials do not exhaust the class of the H-polynomials, as the following example shows. Example 2.6.15. Let, for (x, ξ) ∈ R2 , p(x, ξ) = ξ 2 + ixξ − x3 ,

(2.6.29)

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

106

corresponding in the standard quantization to the ordinary diﬀerential operator P = Dx2 + ixDx − x3 .

(2.6.30)

We have that p is not multi-quasi-elliptic. In fact, let P be the Newton polyhedron of p. Then P is complete, with vertices (0, 0), (3, 0), (0, 2). Assuming p multi-quasi-elliptic, we would have |p(x, ξ)|2 = (ξ 2 − x3 )2 + x2 ξ 2 1 + ξ 4 + x6 for x2 + ξ 2 ≥ R > 0. But this is contradicted on the curve ξ 2 = x3 . Let us show that p(x, ξ) is H-type. Using Proposition 2.4.4 (c), we may limit ourselves to checking that ∂x p(x, ξ)/p(x, ξ) → 0

and

∂ξ p(x, ξ)/p(x, ξ) → 0

(2.6.31)

for (x, ξ) → ∞. In turn, (2.6.31) reduces readily to prove that 2

ξ 2 / |p(x, ξ)| → 0,

2

x4 / |p(x, ξ)| → 0

as (x, ξ) → ∞.

(2.6.32)

If x < 0 the proof of (2.6.32) is easy. Assume x ≥ 0 and, without loss of generality, also ξ ≥ 0. We discuss the validity of (2.6.32) separately in three regions: " "1 " # 1 # 1 # D1 = ξ 2 ≤ x3 , D2 = x3 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 2x3 , D3 = x3 ≤ ξ 2 . 2 2 2 In D1 we have In D2 we estimate In D3 we have

2

|p(x, ξ)| ≥ (ξ 2 − x3 )2 x6 . 2

|p(x, ξ)| ≥ x2 ξ 2 x5 ξ 10/3 . 2

|p(x, ξ)| ≥ (ξ 2 − x3 )2 ξ 4 .

Taking into account that ξ 2 x3 in D1 and x4 ξ 8/3 in D3 , we obtain (2.6.32).

2.7 ΓP -Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators Quasi-elliptic and multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials in R2d are Γρ -hypoelliptic symd bols in Γm ρ (R ) for some ρ with 0 < ρ ≤ 1, see Deﬁnition 2.1.15, Proposition 2.5.3 and Theorem 2.6.9. We may then apply Theorem 2.1.16 to the corresponding operators, obtaining in particular global regularity. However, the algebraic estimates (2.5.10) and (2.6.9) suggest that we may organize a more precise symbolic calculus, provided |z|M and ΛP (z) are admissible weight functions. Namely, we have

2.7. ΓP -Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

107

to check that Φ(z) = Ψ(z) = |z|M , or Φ(z) = Ψ(z) = ΛP (z)ρ , for some range of exponents ρ, are sub-linear and temperate weights, cf. (1.1.1), (1.1.2), satisfying the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10). To this end, re-starting from scratch, we consider a generic complete polyhedron P ⊂ (R+ ∪ {0})n , cf. Deﬁnition 2.6.2, and we deﬁne as in (2.6.2): 1/2 2γ z , z ∈ Rn , (2.7.1) ΛP (z) = γ∈V (P)

where V (P) is the set of the vertices of P. As we observed after Deﬁnition 2.6.2 we have zμ0 ΛP (z) zμ1 , z ∈ Rn , (2.7.2) where μ0 and μ1 are the minimum and the maximum order of P, 0 < μ0 ≤ μ1 . Another obvious remark is that, for every t ∈ R, ΛP (tz) ≤ CΛP (z),

z ∈ Rn ,

(2.7.3)

where the constant C depends on t. The next lemma summarizes the main properties of the function ΛP (z). We use below the notation of Section 2.6, in particular the formal order μ of P is deﬁned by "1 # μ = max : j = 1, . . . , n, ν ∈ N1 (P) . (2.7.4) νj Lemma 2.7.1. Let P be a complete polyhedron in Rn and let ΛP (z) be deﬁned as in (2.7.1). Then for every α ∈ Nn , β ∈ Nn the following estimate holds: α α+β ξ ∂ ΛP (z) ΛP (z)1−|β|/μ , z ∈ Rn , (2.7.5) where μ is the formal order of P. Proof. We argue by induction on k = |α + β|. For k = 0 the estimate (2.7.5) is trivially satisﬁed with C0,0 = 1. For a ﬁxed k ∈ N, let us assume that (2.7.5) holds for any α, β ∈ Nn with |α + β| ≤ k. Consider now α, β ∈ Nn such that |α + β| = k + 1. From (2.7.1) we obtain:

2χ α+β 2 z 2χ−α−β . (ΛP (z) ) = (α + β)! (2.7.6) ∂ α+β χ∈V (P) 2χ≥α+β

So, by Leibniz’ formula, we get ∂

α+β

ΛP (z) =

1 2ΛP (z)

2χ z 2χ−α−β (α + β)! α + β χ∈V (P)

2χ≥α+β

−

δ≤β,η≤α (η,δ)=(0,0), (η,δ)=(α,β)

) α β η+δ α−η+β−δ ∂ ΛP (z)∂ ΛP (z) , δ η

(2.7.7)

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

108 whence

β α+β z ∂ ΛP (z) ≤

1 2ΛP (z)

2χ−α 2χ z (α + β)! α + β χ∈V (P)

2χ≥α+β

+

δ≤β,η≤α (η,δ)=(0,0), (η,δ)=(α,β)

) β−δ α−η+β−δ α β δ η+δ z ∂ ΛP (z) z ∂ ΛP (z) . (2.7.8) δ η

From inductive assumption, we have δ η+δ |η| z ∂ ΛP (z) ΛP (z)1− μ , and

z ∈ Rn

β−δ α−η+β−δ |α−η| z ∂ ΛP (z) ΛP (z)1− μ ,

z ∈ Rn .

(2.7.9) (2.7.10)

We can prove now that 2χ−α |α| z ΛP (z)2− μ ,

z ∈ Rn .

(2.7.11)

The argument follows closely the proof of (2.6.11). In fact, if 2χ = α (β = 0), z 2χ−α ≡ 1 and |α| = 2 |χ| ≤ 2μ1 ≤ 2μ (μ1 := maxχ∈V (P) |χ|), so that |α|

ΛP (z)2− μ ≥ 1 and the inequality (2.7.11) is trivially veriﬁed. Let us consider now the case when 2χ > α. As χ ∈ V (P) ⊂ P, we have χ · ν ≤ 1 and, from the deﬁnition of μ, α · ν ≥ μ1 |α|, when ν ∈ N1 (P). Since 2μ − |α| > 0, μ the previous inequalities yield 2μ−|α| (2χ − α) · ν ≤ 1, as ν ∈ N1 (P), and then μ μ (2χ − α) ∈ P. So z 2χ−α 2μ−|α| ≤ ΛP (z), whence the estimate (2.7.11) 2μ−|α| follows. So estimates (2.7.9), (2.7.10) and (2.7.11), jointly with (2.7.8), give (2.7.5) for |α + β| = k + 1 and conclude the proof. Let us detail some consequences of Lemma 2.7.1. Through the following we will set for brevity K := {γ ∈ Nn : γj ∈ {0, 1}, j = 1, . . . , n}. Proposition 2.7.2. Let ΛP (z) be deﬁned as in (2.7.1). Then for any m ∈ R, α ∈ Nn , γ ∈ K we have γ α+γ z ∂ ΛP (z)m ΛP (z)m−|α|/μ , z ∈ Rn . (2.7.12) Proof. By induction one can easily prove the estimates m |z γ ∂ α+γ ΛP (z) | |α+γ|

≤

k=1

Cm,k ΛP (z)m−k

Cα,γ,k z γ1 ∂ α1 +γ1 ΛP (z) · · · z γk ∂ αk +γk ΛP (z) ,

2.7. ΓP -Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

109

for any α ∈ Nn and γ ∈ K with |α + γ| > 0. For any 1 ≤ k ≤ |α + γ|, the multi-indices in the second sum of the right-hand side span over all the 2k-tuples (γ1 , . . . , γk , α1 , . . . αk ) ∈ Kk ×(Nn )k such that γ1 +. . .+γk = γ and α1 +. . .+αk = α, cf. the proof of Lemma 1.3.5. In order to complete the proof, it suﬃces now to apply the estimates (2.7.5) to each term |z γJ ∂ αJ +γJ ΛP (z)|, J = 1, . . . , k. Proposition 2.7.3. For ΛP (z) deﬁned as before, there exist positive constants C and such that for all z, ζ ∈ Rn : 1 1 (i) ΛP (z) μ − ΛP (ζ) μ ≤ C |z − ζ|; (ii) C −1 ≤

ΛP (z) ΛP (ζ)

1

≤ C if |z − ζ| ≤ ΛP (z) μ .

Proof. By means of Taylor’s expansion we have 1

1

ΛP (ζ) μ − ΛP (z) μ =

1 1 (ζ − z)α ∂ α ΛP (θ) μ , α!

(2.7.13)

|α|=1

where θ = tζ + (1 − t)z, for some 0 < t < 1. Then: 1 1 1 1 |ζ − z| ∂ α ΛP (θ) μ , ΛP (ζ) μ − ΛP (z) μ ≤ α!

(2.7.14)

|α|=1

1 proving assertion (i), since for |α| = 1, ∂ α ΛP (θ) μ ≤ cα in view of (2.7.12). 1

Let us assume now that |ζ − z| ≤ ΛP (z) μ . From (2.7.14) again, we have 1 1 1 ΛP (ζ) μ − ΛP (z) μ ≤ C1 ΛP (z) μ that is (1 − C1 )μ ΛP (z) ≤ ΛP (ζ) ≤ (1 + C1 )μ ΛP (z), which for a suitable > 0 shows (ii). Corollary 2.7.4. Let 0 < ρ ≤ μ1 . Then Φ(z) = Ψ(z) = ΛP (z)ρ , z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d , are sub-linear and temperate weights, cf. (1.1.1), (1.1.2), satisfying the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10). Proof. Since in (2.7.1) 0 ∈ V (P) (cf. (2) in Deﬁnition 2.6.2), we have ΛP (z) ≥ 1. More precisely, ΛP (z) zμ0 with μ0 > 0, cf. (2.7.2). Sub-linear growth in (1.1.1) follows from (i) in Proposition 2.7.3, by ﬁxing there ζ = 0. It is clear that it suﬃces to verify the temperance estimate (1.1.2) for a ﬁxed power of ΛP (z). Now, by (i) in Proposition 2.7.3, 1

1

ΛP (ζ) μ ΛP (z) μ + |z − ζ| ,

z ∈ R2d , ζ ∈ R2d , 1

(2.7.15) 1

which gives the temperance estimate (1.1.2) for ΛP (z) μ when |z − ζ| ΛP (z) μ . 1 On the other hand, when ΛP (z) μ |z − ζ|, (2.7.15) yields 1

1

ΛP (ζ) μ |z − ζ| ≤ ΛP (z) μ (1 + |z − ζ|),

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

110 1

1

since ΛP (z) μ ≥ 1. Hence (1.1.2) is proved for ΛP (z) μ . Finally, since ρ > 0 the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10) is satisﬁed as well, by the lower bound in (2.7.2). Remark 2.7.5. Note that the slow variation conditions (1.3.8) are also satisﬁed by Φ(z) = Ψ(z) = ΛP (z)ρ , and M (z) = ΛP (z)m , m ∈ R. Indeed they reduce to prove that there exists > 0 such that ΛP (z) ΛP (ζ) ΛP (z)

1

|ζ − z| ≤ ΛP (z) μ ,

for

(2.7.16)

which coincides with (ii) in the previous Proposition 2.7.3. Example 2.7.6. As in Section 2.5, let M = (M1 , . . . , Mn ) be an n-tuple of rational numbers Mj ≥ 1 with minj Mj = 1, and deﬁne |z|M =

n

|zj |

1/Mj

.

(2.7.17)

j=1

We may choose m ∈ N in such a way that all the m/Mj , Mj = 1, . . . , n, are integers. Then we have from Remark 2.5.6 and Example 2.6.5: n 1/2 2m/Mj |z|m Λ (ζ) = 1 + z , P j M

|z| ≥ R > 0,

(2.7.18)

j=1

with

n # " Mj zj /m ≤ 1 . P = z ∈ Rn : z ≥ 0,

(2.7.19)

j=1

For such P the formal order μ is given by m. 1 In view of Corollary 2.7.4, taking Φ(z) = Ψ(z) = ΛP (z) m |z|M we obtain a couple of sub-linear and temperate weights. Note that slow variation and temperance can be deduced for |z|M directly from (2.7.17); however, in view of 1 Proposition 2.7.2, the equivalent function ΛP (z) m satisﬁes the estimates (2.7.12), providing more precise information. In the sequel, ΛP (z) is deﬁned as in (2.7.1), corresponding to a complete polyhedron P in Rn , with n = 2d. We understand z = (x, ξ), x ∈ Rd , ξ ∈ Rd . As before μ denotes the formal order of P. d Deﬁnition 2.7.7. Let m ∈ R and 0 < ρ ≤ μ1 . We denote by Γm ρ,P (R ), or for short m ∞ 2d 2d Γρ,P , the class of functions a ∈ C (R ) such that, for all α ∈ N ,

|∂ α a(z)| ΛP (z)m−ρ|α| , m We also write Γm P for the class Γ 1 ,P . μ

z ∈ R2d .

(2.7.20)

2.7. ΓP -Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

111

In view of Corollary 2.7.4, we may develop a symbolic calculus for the corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential operators, by applying the results of Chapter 1. Note that we assume ρ > 0, and the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10) is satisﬁed, cf. (2.7.2). We may also deﬁne Sobolev spaces corresponding to ΛP (z) and obtain Fredholmness on them for the ΛP -elliptic operators. The results can be obviously particularized to the case ΛP (z) |z|m M . We leave all this to the reader. m In the following we prefer to limit attention to M Γm ρ,P , subclass of Γρ,P , whose deﬁnition below is suggested by the sharp estimates (2.7.12). On the one hand, parametrices of operators with multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials as symbols belong to the corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential subclass OPM Γm ρ,P , so nothing is lost in the application. On the other hand, operators in the subclass OPM Γ0ρ,P turn out to be bounded on Lp (Rd ), 1 < p < ∞, as we shall prove in Section 2.8. d Deﬁnition 2.7.8. For m ∈ R and 0 < ρ ≤ μ1 , we denote by M Γm ρ,P (R ), for short ∞ 2d M Γm ρ,P , the class of the functions a(z) ∈ C (R ) such that

z γ ∂ γ a(z) ∈ Γm ρ,P

(2.7.21)

for any γ ∈ K = {γ ∈ N2d : γj ∈ {0, 1}, j = 1, . . . , 2d}. We also write M Γm P for . the class M Γm 1 ,P μ

Example 2.7.9. Given a complete polyhedron P in R2d , consider the polynomial cβ z β , cβ ∈ C, z ∈ R2d . (2.7.22) p(z) = β∈P

We have p ∈ M Γ1P . In fact, denoting by Q the Newton polyhedron of p(z), we have Q ⊂ P, hence ΛQ (z) ≤ ΛP (z). From Theorem 2.6.6 we then obtain |p(z)| ΛQ (z) ≤ ΛP (z),

z ∈ R2d .

From the ﬁrst part of the proof of Theorem 2.6.9, cf. in particular (2.6.11), we have the more precise information |∂ α p(z)| ΛP (z)1−|α|/μ ,

z ∈ R2d .

This shows that p ∈ Γ1P . On the other hand, for any γ ∈ N2d we have z γ ∂ γ p(z) = cγβ z β β∈P

for new coeﬃcients cγβ ∈ C. The preceding arguments give then z γ ∂ γ p(z) ∈ Γ1P . Hence we obtain p ∈ M Γ1P . Note that this conclusion does not require the multiquasi-ellipticity of p(z) in (2.7.22). We list some propositions; they are obvious variants of the standard symbolic calculus and proofs are omitted.

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

112

Proposition 2.7.10. The following statements are equivalent: (1) a(z) ∈ M Γm ρ,P ; m−ρ|α|

(2) z γ ∂ α+γ a(z) ∈ Γρ,P

for all α ∈ N2d and γ ∈ K;

(3) for every α ∈ N2d and γ ∈ K, |z γ ∂ α+γ a(z)| ΛP (z)m−ρ|α| , Proposition 2.7.11. For m, m ∈ R, 0 < ρ ≤ ρ ≤

1 μ

z ∈ R2d .

(2.7.23)

the following properties hold:

m (1) if m ≤ m , then M Γm ρ,P ⊂ M Γρ ,P ;

m+m m ; (2) if a(z) ∈ M Γm ρ,P and b(z) ∈ M Γρ,P , then (ab)(z) ∈ M Γρ,P m−ρ|α|

α (3) if a(z) ∈ M Γm ρ,P , then ∂ a(z) ∈ M Γρ,P

Proposition 2.7.12. Let m ∈ R and 0 < ρ ≤

1 μ.

, for any α ∈ N2d .

Then the following inclusions hold:

m 0 Γm−N ⊂ M Γm ρ,P ⊂ Γρ,P , ρ,P

where N0 := 2d

1 μ0

(2.7.24)

− ρ , cf. (2.7.2). m

j , Deﬁnition 2.7.13. We say that a sequence {aj }j∈N of symbols aj (z) ∈ M Γρ,P such that mj > mj+1 and limj→∞ mj = −∞, is an asymptotic expansion for 0 a(z) ∈ M Γm ρ,P and write a(z) ∼ aj (z),

if, for any integer N ≥ 1, a(z) −

j

j
N aj (z) ∈ M Γm ρ,P .

Proposition 2.7.14. If {aj }j∈N is a sequence of symbols as in Deﬁnition 2.7.13, 0 there exists a(z) ∈ M Γm ρ,P for which {aj }j∈N is an asymptotic expansion. Moreover ! m 2d the symbol a(z) is unique modulo Γ−∞ m∈R Γρ,P = S(R ). ρ,P := The following notion of ellipticity is the same as that in Deﬁnition 1.3.1. Deﬁnition 2.7.15. The symbol a(z) ∈ Γm ρ,P is P-elliptic of order m if, for some constant R > 0, (2.7.25) |a(z)| ΛP (z)m , |z| ≥ R. We will write EΓm ρ,P for the class of the P-elliptic symbols of order m and m m m m m m EM Γm ρ,P = EΓρ,P ∩ M Γρ,P . We also set EΓP = EΓ1/μ,P , EM ΓP = EM Γ1/μ,P . Example 2.7.16. We know from Example 2.7.9 that the polynomial cβ z β , cβ ∈ C, z ∈ R2d , p(z) = β∈P

2.7. ΓP -Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

113

can be regarded as an element of M Γ1P . The P-ellipticity assumption in (2.7.25), |p(z)| ΛP (z),

|z| ≥ R,

is then equivalent to the multi-quasi-ellipticity of p(z) in the sense of Deﬁnition 2.6.8. Concerning the P-elliptic symbols we have the following proposition; since it has a key role in the following, we shall give the details of the proof. ∞ 2d Proposition 2.7.17. Consider a(z) ∈ EΓm ρ,P and let ψ(z) be a function in C (R ) which is identically zero for |z| ≤ R and identically 1 for |z| ≥ R , with 0 < ψ(z) −m m R < R suﬃciently large. Then ψ(z) a(z) ∈ EΓρ,P . If a(z) ∈ EM Γρ,P , then a(z) ∈ EM Γ−m ρ,P .

Proof. Since a(z) fulﬁlls estimate (2.7.25) with a suitable positive R, taking any ∈ ψ(z) satisfying the prescribed assumptions with R > R > R, we have ψ(z) a(z) ∞ 2d C (R ). The ﬁrst statement then follows from Lemma 1.3.5. ∈ Γ−m For the second one, it suﬃces to prove that z γ ∂ γ ψ(z) ρ,P for any non-zero a(z) γ ∈ K. By use of Leibniz’ rule and by induction we see that for γ = 0, γ ∈ K, zγ ∂ γ

|ν| z γ ∂ γ ψ(z) ψ(z) z γ−ν ∂ γ−ν ψ(z) Ck,ν,ν 1 ,...,ν k = + a(z) a(z) a(z)k+1 0=ν≤γ k=1

1

1

k

k

× z ν ∂ ν a(z) . . . z ν ∂ ν a(z),

(2.7.26)

where, for any ν ≤ γ and 1 ≤ k ≤ |ν|, the last sum in the right-hand side is taken over all the k-tuples (ν 1 , . . . , ν k ) ∈ K × . . . × K such that ν 1 + . . . + ν k = ν, while Ck,ν,ν 1 ,...,ν k are suitable constants depending on ν ≤ γ, ν 1 , . . . , ν k and k. γ−ν

−m(k+1)

γ−ν

z ∂ ψ(z) ∈ Γρ,P for every ν ≤ γ, k ≥ 0 Since a(z) ∈ EΓm ρ,P , then a(z)k+1 −∞ 2d (it belongs in particular to Γρ,P = S(R ) when ν < γ); on the other hand, J

J

z ν ∂ ν a(z) ∈ Γm ρ,P for J = 1, . . . , k. This just shows that z γ ∂ γ ψ(z) ∈ Γ−m ρ,P and completes the proof. a(z)

Remark 2.7.18. As an immediate consequence of Propositions 2.7.2 and 2.7.10, we see that any real power of a weight function ΛP (z)m is a P-elliptic symbol of order m; more precisely ΛP (z)m ∈ EM Γm for any m ∈ R. 1 ,P μ

We pass then to consider the related classes of pseudo-diﬀerential operators. From now on we split z = (x, ξ), x ∈ Rd , ξ ∈ Rd . Firstly, we list some notions and related results which will be useful in the sequel. We shall associate to each symbol a(x, ξ) ∈ Γm ρ,P the pseudo-diﬀerential operator of τ -type, cf. (1.2.1): ¯ dξ, ¯ u ∈ S(Rd ), (2.7.27) Au(x) = ei(x−y)ξ a((1 − τ )x + τ y, ξ)u(y) dy

114

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

where τ ∈ R is ﬁxed. According to the results of Section 1.2, diﬀerent choices of τ deﬁne the same class of operators, which we shall denote by OPΓm ρ,P . We recall and a (x, ξ) and a (x, ξ) are the τ and the τ -symbol of A that if A ∈ OPΓm τ τ 1 2 1 2 ρ,P respectively, then aτ2 (x, ξ) ∼

1 (τ1 − τ2 )|α| ∂ξα Dxα aτ1 (x, ξ), α! α

(2.7.28)

see Remark 1.2.6. According to the notations of Section 1.2, a0 (x, ξ) corresponding to the standard quantization τ = 0 is called the left symbol of A, a1 (x, ξ) corresponding to τ = 1 the right symbol of A and a 12 (x, ξ) corresponding to τ = 12 the Weyl symbol of A. We refer to Section 1.2 for details concerning the pseudodiﬀerential calculus in classes OPΓm ρ,P . Now we are interested in the operators in OPΓm ρ,P with τ -symbol a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γm . ρ,P Proposition 2.7.19. Let A ∈ OPΓm ρ,P and τ1 ∈ R. If the τ1 -symbol aτ1 (x, ξ) of A , then the τ -symbol aτ2 (x, ξ) also belongs to M Γm belongs to M Γm 2 ρ,P ρ,P , for every τ2 ∈ R. Proof. For any τ2 ∈ R, the τ2 -symbol of A can be expressed in terms of its τ1 symbol by means of the asymptotic expansion (2.7.28). By Proposition 2.7.11, ∂ξα Dxα aτ1 (x, ξ) ∈ M Γm−2ρN for |α| = N and then aτ2 (x, ξ) ∈ M Γm ρ,P by Proposiρ,P tion 2.7.12. m We set OPM Γm ρ,P for the subclass of OPΓρ,P consisting of the operators with τ m symbol in M Γρ,P . Thanks to the above proposition, OPM Γm ρ,P is independent of τ.

m Proposition 2.7.20. If A ∈ OPM Γm ρ,P and B ∈ OPM Γρ,P , then

; (1) AB ∈ OPM Γm+m ρ,P (2) tA ∈ OPM Γm ρ,P ; (3) A∗ ∈ OPM Γm ρ,P .

m Proof. Let a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γm ρ,P and b(x, ξ) ∈ M Γρ,P be the Weyl symbols of A and B

of C = AB we have respectively. Then for the Weyl symbol c(x, ξ) ∈ Γm+m ρ,P c(x, ξ) ∼

(−1)|β| α,β

α!β!

2−|α+β| ∂ξα Dxβ a(x, ξ)∂ξβ Dxα b(x, ξ),

cf. Theorem 1.2.17. In view of Proposition 2.7.11,

−2ρN ∂ξα Dxβ a(x, ξ)∂ξβ Dxα b(x, ξ) ∈ M Γm+m , ρ,P

(2.7.29)

2.7. ΓP -Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

115

for |α + β| = N , and then c(x, ξ) ∈ M Γm+m by Proposition 2.7.12. This proves ρ,P the ﬁrst statement. For statements (2) and (3), it suﬃces to observe that the Weyl symbols t a(x, ξ) and a∗ (x, ξ) of t A and A∗ respectively are related to the Weyl symbol a(x, ξ) of A by the formulas t

a(x, ξ) = a(x, −ξ),

(2.7.30)

a∗ (x, ξ) = a(x, ξ),

(2.7.31)

∗

cf. (1.2.14), (1.2.16). Thus a(x, ξ), a (x, ξ) ∈ t

M Γm ρ,P .

Given a(x, ξ) ∈ Γm ρ,P , we may also deﬁne the operator Aa with Anti-Wick symbol a(x, ξ), cf. Section 1.7. As an easy consequence of the formula (1.7.17) for the asymptotic expansion of the Weyl symbol of A, we obtain the following result. m Proposition 2.7.21. If a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γm ρ,P , then Aa ∈ OPM Γρ,P .

We also recall from Section 1.3.1 that the notion of ellipticity does not depend on the quantization, cf. Proposition 1.3.4. Proposition 2.7.22. Let τ1 , τ2 ∈ R be given. If the τ1 -symbol aτ1 (x, ξ) of A ∈ m OPΓm ρ,P belongs to EΓρ,P , the same holds for the τ2 -symbol aτ2 (x, ξ). The parametrix of an operator with symbol a(x, ξ) ∈ EΓm ρ,P can be constructed as in Section 1.3.1. For the parametrix of an operator with symbol in EM Γm ρ,P the following holds: Proposition 2.7.23. Let P ∈ OPM Γm ρ,P be given with P-elliptic symbol. Then there exists an operator Q with symbol in EM Γ−m ρ,P such that P Q = I + R,

QP = I + S,

(2.7.32)

where R, S are regularizing and I is the identity operator. Proof. We know already from Section 1.3.1 that there exists Q ∈ OPΓ−m ρ,P with P-elliptic symbol satisfying the identities (2.7.32). ∞ Moreover, if p(x, ξ) ∈ EM Γm ρ,P is the Weyl symbol of P and ψ(x, ξ) is a C function as in Proposition 2.7.17 (with z = (x, ξ)) we may write Q = RB1 , where B1 is the operator with Weyl symbol b1 (x, ξ) = ψ(x,ξ) p(x,ξ) while R is an operator in OPΓ0ρ,P whose Weyl symbol r(x, ξ) has the following asymptotic expansion: r(x, ξ) ∼

(−1)j rj (x, ξ),

(2.7.33)

j≥0

where r1 (x, ξ) is the Weyl symbol of the operator R1 := B1 P − I and, for any j ≥ 0, rj (x, ξ) is the Weyl symbol of the j-th power R1j of R1 (see the proof of

116

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

Theorem 1.3.6). By Proposition 2.7.17, we know that b1 (x, ξ) ∈ M Γ−m ρ,P . Since moreover r1 (x, ξ) has the asymptotic expansion r1 (x, ξ) ∼

|α+β|>0

(−1)|β| −|α+β| α β ψ(x, ξ) β α 2 ∂ D p(x, ξ) ∂ξ Dx α!β! p(x, ξ) ξ x −2ρ|α+β|

β α and, for all α, β, ∂ξα Dxβ ψ(x,ξ) p(x,ξ) ∂ξ Dx p(x, ξ) ∈ M Γρ,P

(2.7.34)

, in view of Propositions

2.7.11 and 2.7.12, it follows that r1 (x, ξ) ∈ M Γ−2ρ ρ,P . From Proposition 2.7.20, we −2ρj deduce rj (x, ξ) ∈ M Γρ,P and, by virtue of (2.7.33), r(x, ξ) ∈ M Γ0ρ,P . So Q = RB1 ∈ OPM Γ−m ρ,P is the required parametrix.

Proposition 2.7.23 gives in particular the existence of a parametrix with sym−1 bol in EM Γ−1 P = EM Γ1/μ,P and the global regularity for the operators with polynomial coeﬃcients P = cαβ xβ D α , (β,α)∈P

obtained by standard quantization from a multi-quasi-elliptic polynomial cγ z γ , z = (x, ξ), p(z) = γ∈P

cf. Examples 2.7.9 and 2.7.16 (actually, in view of Proposition 2.7.22, the multiquasi-ellipticity of the symbol classes does not depend on the quantization). On the other hand, global regularity for such operators follows from Theorem 2.1.16 and Theorem 2.6.9. The advantage of providing a parametrix of P with symbol in EM Γ−1 P will be evident in the next section.

2.8 Lp -Estimates As in the preceding section, P is a complete polyhedron in R2d with formal order μ and ΛP (z) is the corresponding weight function. For 0 < ρ ≤ 1/μ, m ∈ R, the m classes of symbols M Γm ρ,P and the classes of operators OPM Γρ,P are deﬁned as 2d before. Namely, a(z) ∈ M Γm and γ ∈ K2d = {γ ∈ ρ,P means that for every α ∈ N 2d N : γj ∈ {0, 1}, j = 1, . . . , 2d}, |z γ ∂ α+γ a(z)| ΛP (z)m−ρ|α| ,

z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

(2.8.1)

Theorem 2.8.1. Any operator A ∈ OPM Γ0ρ,P extends to a bounded operator from Lp (Rd ) to itself, for all 1 < p < ∞. Actually, to obtain Lp -boundedness, we shall use much weaker assumptions than a ∈ M Γ0ρ,P on the symbol of A. Namely it will be suﬃcient to assume for a(x, ξ) ∈ C ∞ (R2d ): |ξ γ ∂xλ ∂ξν+γ a(x, ξ)| ξ−|ν| ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d ,

(2.8.2)

2.8. Lp -Estimates

117

for some > 0, all λ ∈ Nd , ν ∈ Nd , γ ∈ Kd = {γ ∈ Nd : γj ∈ {0, 1}, j = 1, . . . , d}. Note that if (2.8.1) is satisﬁed with m = 0, then (2.8.2) is valid with = ρμ0 , where μ0 is the minimum order of P, cf. (2.7.2). The proof of Theorem 2.8.1 will use the classical result of Lizorkin and Marcinkiewicz concerning Fourier multipliers, that we begin to recall here below. Theorem 2.8.2. Let the function m(ξ) be continuous together with its derivatives ∂ξγ m(ξ), for any γ ∈ Kd . If there is a constant B > 0 such that |ξ γ ∂ξγ m(ξ)| ≤ B,

ξ ∈ Rd , γ ∈ Kd ,

(2.8.3)

then for every 1 < p < ∞ we can ﬁnd a constant Ap > 0, depending only on p, B and the dimension d, such that

m(D)u Lp ≤ Ap u Lp for all u ∈ S(Rd ). Proof of Theorem 2.8.1. We use for A the left-symbol representation dξ, ¯ ϕ ∈ S(Rd ), Aϕ(x) = a(x, D)ϕ(x) = eixξ a(x, ξ)ϕ(ξ)

(2.8.4)

with a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γ0ρ,P . For m = (m1 , . . . , md ) ∈ Zd let us consider + * 1 Qm = x ∈ Rd : |xj − mj | ≤ , j = 1, 2, . . . , d , 2 + * 2 ∗ d Qm = x ∈ R : |xj − mj | ≤ , j = 1, 2, . . . , d , 3 * + d = x ∈ R : |x − m | ≤ 1, j = 1, 2, . . . , d , Q∗∗ j j m and cut-oﬀ functions ψm (x) ∈ C0∞ (Rd ) such that 0 ≤ ψm (x) ≤ 1, supp ψm ⊂ Q∗∗ m and ψm = 1 in Q∗m . Setting ϕ1,m = ψm ϕ and ϕ2,m = (1 − ψm )ϕ, we have |a(x, D)ϕ(x)|p dx ≤ 2p−1 {I1,m + I2,m }, (2.8.5) m∈Zd

where

p

|a(x, D)ϕi,m (x)| dx,

Ii,m =

i = 1, 2.

(2.8.6)

Qm

In fact, since Rd = ∪m∈Zd Qm and the measure of Qm ∩ Qn vanishes when n = m, we can write for ϕ(x) ∈ S(Rd ): p

a(x, D)ϕ pp = |a(x, D)ϕ(x)| dx. (2.8.7) m∈Zd

Qm

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

118

Moreover, for any m ∈ Zd , p |a(x, D)ϕ(x)| dx = Qm

p

|a(x, D)(ϕ1,m + ϕ2,m )(x)| dx

Qm

≤ 2p−1 {I1,m + I2,m }.

(2.8.8)

Therefore (2.8.5) is proved. To continue the proof, we shall use the following lemma. Lemma 2.8.3. Let a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γ0ρ,P , χ(x) ∈ C0∞ (Rd ) and set aχ (x, ξ) = χ(x)a(x, ξ); we can then consider the Fourier transform of aχ (x, ξ) with respect to the x variable ¯ (2.8.9) aχ (η, ξ) = e−ixη aχ (x, ξ) dx. For any N > 0 there is a positive constant CN,χ such that γ γ aχ (η, ξ) ≤ CN,χ (1 + |η|)−N , ξ ∂ξ

(2.8.10)

for all η, ξ ∈ Rd and γ ∈ Kd . Proof. Since aχ (x, ξ) has compact support with respect to the x variable, diﬀerentiation and integration by parts in (2.8.9) give β γ |β| e−ixη ∂xβ ∂ξγ aχ (x, ξ) dx, aχ (η, ξ) = (−i) ¯ (2.8.11) η ∂ξ where β is an arbitrary multi-index. β β γ γ aχ (η, ξ) ≤ η ξ ∂ξ ν

Then by Leibniz’ formula we get β−ν ∂x χ(x) ξ γ ∂xν ∂ γ a(x, ξ) dx. ¯ ξ

(2.8.12)

ν≤β

Since ξ γ ∂xν ∂ξγ a(x, ξ) ≤ Cγ,ν ΛP (x, ξ)−ρ|ν| ≤ Cγ,ν (cf. (2.8.1) or (2.8.2)), we obtain β γ γ aχ (η, ξ) ≤ Cβ,χ , η ξ ∂ξ

(2.8.13)

for every η, ξ ∈ Rd and γ ∈ Kd , where the positive constant on the right-hand side is given by β−ν β ∂x χ(x) dx. Cγ,ν ¯ (2.8.14) Cβ,χ = max γ∈Kd ν ν≤β

Thus by summing on |β| ≤ N we obtain the desired conclusion.

Continuing the proof of Theorem 2.8.1. In order to estimate I1,m in (2.8.5), (2.8.6), let us consider a cut-oﬀ function θ(x) ∈ C0∞ (Rd ) such that θ(x) = 1 for x ∈ Q0

2.8. Lp -Estimates

119

and deﬁne θm (x) = θ(x − m) for any m ∈ Zd . By setting now am (x, ξ) := θm (x)a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γ0ρ,P we get p p |am (x, D)ϕ1,m | dx ≤ |am (x, D)ϕ1,m | dx. (2.8.15) I1,m = Rd

Qm

If we set now χ(x) = θm (x) in Lemma 2.8.3, we can show that for every N > 0 there exists a positive constant CN such that γ γ am (η, ξ) ≤ CN (1 + |η|)−N η, ξ ∈ Rd , γ ∈ Kd . (2.8.16) ξ ∂ξ Notice that, from the deﬁnition of the functions θm (x) and (2.8.14), the constant CN in (2.8.16) depends on θ(x) but not on m ∈ Zd . Then by Theorem 2.8.2 for every N > 0 there exists MN > 0, which does not depend on m, such that

am (η, D)u Lp ≤ MN (1 + |η|)−N u Lp ,

(2.8.17)

for every u ∈ S(Rd ), η ∈ Rd and m ∈ Zd . On the other hand, from Fubini’s theorem we have ixξ u(ξ) dξ ¯ = eixη am (η, D)u(x) dη. ¯ (2.8.18) am (x, D)u(x) = e am (x, ξ) So by using (2.8.17) and Minkowski’s inequality in integral form, we have p p I1,m ≤ eixη am (η, D)ϕ1,m (x) dη ¯ dx ≤

am (η, D)ϕ1,m Lp dη ¯ p p p p ≤ MN

ϕ1,m pLp ¯ = MN CN ϕ1,m pLp , (2.8.19) (1 + |η|)−N dη where, for N > d, CN := (1 + |η|)−N dη ¯ < ∞. To estimate the second term I2,m we use the kernel representation, cf. (1.2.2), (1.2.3), (1.2.4): a(x, D)ϕ(x) = K0 (x, y)ϕ(y) dy (2.8.20) Rd

with K0 (x, y) = K(x, x − y), where, in the distribution sense, K(x, t) = (2π)−d eitξ a(x, ξ) dξ.

(2.8.21)

Rd

We need the following lemma. Lemma 2.8.4. If a ∈ M Γ0ρ,P , then for every suﬃciently large positive integer N , there is a positive constant CN such that −N

|K(x, t)| ≤ CN |t|

,

t = 0.

(2.8.22)

120

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

Proof. Let ν ∈ Nd be an arbitrary multi-index. We obtain from (2.8.21) in the distribution sense ν −d eitξ ∂ξν a(x, ξ) dξ. (−it) K(x, t) = (2π) Rd

Since a ∈ M Γ0ρ,P , then (2.8.2) is valid. Hence for suﬃciently large ν we have |tν | |K(x, t)| ≤ Cν ,

x ∈ Rd , t ∈ Rd ,

for a positive constant Cν . The estimates (2.8.22) follow immediately.

End of the proof of Theorem 2.8.1. By (2.8.20), (2.8.21) and Lemma 2.8.4, there is a constant C2N such that, for all x ∈ Qm , K(x, x − y)ϕ2,m (y)dy |a(x, D)ϕ2,m (x)| = d R = K(x, x − y)ϕ2,m (y)dy Rd \Q∗m −2N ≤ C2N |x − y| |ϕ2,m (y)| dy. Rd \Q∗ m

/ Q∗m : We may further estimate under the integral, for x ∈ Qm and y ∈ |x − y|−2N ≤ CN (λ + |x − y|)−N (λ + |m − y|)−N , for any ﬁxed λ > 0 and for √a suitable positive constant CN (depending on λ). d Take in particular λ = 1 + 2 . By Minkowski’s inequality in integral form we obtain

1/p 1/p p |a(x, D)ϕ2,m (x)| dx I2,m = Qm

p )1/p (λ + |x − y|)−N |ϕ2,m (y)| ≤ dy dx (λ + |m − y|)N Qm Rd \Q∗ m 1/p p (λ + |x − y|)−N p |ϕ2,m (y)| ≤ C2N CN dx dy (λ + |m − y|)N p Rd \Q∗ Qm m 1/p |ϕ2,m (y)| −N p = C2N CN (λ + |x − y|) dx dy, (λ + |m − y|)N Rd \Q∗ Qm m C2N CN

so that for N suﬃciently large and new constants C˜N > 0, 1/p ˜ I2,m ≤ CN (λ + |m − y|)−N |ϕ2,m (y)| dy. Rd \Q∗ m

2.8. Lp -Estimates

121

Applying Hölder’s inequality we easily deduce the following estimate: p |ϕ2,m (y)| I2,m ≤ HN,p N p dy, 2 Rd \Q∗ m (λ + |m − y|)

(2.8.23)

where HN,p is a positive constant depending only on N , p and the dimension d. d From the deﬁnition of ϕ1,m and Q∗∗ m , m ∈ Z , we obtain p

ϕ1,m pLp = |ϕ1,m (x)| dx ≤ Cd ϕ pLp , (2.8.24) m∈Zd

m∈Zd

Q∗∗ m

where the constant Cd > 0 depends only on the dimension d. Moreover p p |ϕ2,m (y)| |ϕ2,m (y)| N p dy ≤ N p dy 2 Rd \Q∗ Ql (λ + |m − y|) 2 m (λ + |m − y|) m∈Zd m∈Zd l=m 1 p ≤ |ϕ(y)| dy Np (1 + |m − l|) 2 Ql m∈Zd l∈Zd 1 = ϕ pLp (2.8.25) Np (1 + |m|) 2 m∈Zd 1 and m∈Zd N p < ∞ for suitably large N . By (2.8.6) and the estimates (1+|m|)

2

(2.8.5), (2.8.19), (2.8.23), (2.8.24), (2.8.25) we then get:

ϕ pLp ,

a(x, D)ϕ pLp ≤ Cp,d

(2.8.26)

which ends the proof.

We may now deﬁne L -Sobolev spaces related to a complete polyhedron P. p

Deﬁnition 2.8.5. For s ∈ R and 1 < p < ∞, HPs,p is the space of all the temperate distributions u ∈ S (Rd ) such that ΛsP (x, D)u ∈ Lp (Rd ). Here ΛsP (x, D) is the pseudo-diﬀerential operator with left symbol ΛP (x, ξ)s ∈ M Γs1 ,P , that is μ ΛsP (x, D)u(x) = eixξ ΛP (x, ξ)s u (ξ) dξ, ¯ u ∈ S(Rd ). Set HPp = HP1,p . Since ΛP (x, ξ)s is P-elliptic of order s (see Remark 2.7.18), ¯ −s (x, D) ∈ OPM Γ−s such in view of Proposition 2.7.23, there exists an operator Λ ρ,P that ¯ −s (x, D)Λs (x, D) = I + Rs , Λ (2.8.27) P 2

2

where Rs is regularizing. When ΛP (x, ξ) = (1 + |x| + |ξ| )1/2 and p = 2 the spaces HPs,p coincide with the spaces HΓs (Rd ) of Section 2.1. We impose a Banach topology on HPs,p by setting, for any u ∈ HPs,p ,

u s,p,P = ΛsP (x, D)u Lp + Rs u Lp , where Rs is deﬁned by (2.8.27).

(2.8.28)

122

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

Proposition 2.8.6. HPs,p is a Banach space with respect to the norm · s,p,P deﬁned by (2.8.28). Proof. In the following we write for short Λs = ΛsP (x, D) and Λ−s = Λ−s (x, D). Of course, · s,p,P is a semi-norm in HPs,p . Let us suppose u s,p,P = 0. By (2.8.28) it follows that Λs u = 0 and Rs u = 0; then u = Λ−s (Λs u) − Rs u = 0, in view of (2.8.27). To prove the completeness, let {uν }ν∈N be a Cauchy sequence in HPs,p with respect to · s,p,P . Then it follows that {Λs uν }ν∈N and {Rs uν }ν∈N are Cauchy sequences in Lp (Rd ); let v and w be their limits in Lp (Rd ), respectively. We prove now that {uν }ν∈N converges to u := Λ−s v − w in HPs,p . Setting vν := Λs uν and wν := Rs uν , we get Λs uν = Λs Λ−s vν − Λs wν . Since vν → v in Lp (Rd ) and Λs Λ−s ∈ OPM Γ01 ,P , Λs Λ−s vν → Λs Λ−s v in Lp (Rd ) in view of μ

Theorem 2.8.1. On the other hand, since Rs is a regularizing operator, uν → Λ−s v − w in S (Rd ) yields wν = Rs uν → Rs (Λ−s v − w) in S(Rd ). Thus, for the uniqueness of the limit, wν → w in S(Rd ) and then Λs wν → Λs w in S(Rd ). This shows that Λs u ∈ Lp (Rd ) and that Λs uν = Λs Λ−s vν − Λs wν → Λs Λ−s v − Λs w = Λs u in Lp (Rd ). The proof is therefore concluded. In fact the previous Sobolev spaces can be better described by means of any pseudo-diﬀerential operator with positive Anti-Wick elliptic symbol. Firstly we recall the following version of Proposition 1.7.12, cf. Theorem 2.1.7. Lemma 2.8.7. Let a(x, ξ) ∈ Γm ρ,P be P-elliptic of order m and assume that a(x, ξ) > 0, for any x, ξ ∈ Rd . Then the operator Aa with Anti-Wick symbol a is an isomor−m phism of S(Rd ) extending to an isomorphism of S (Rd ). Moreover A−1 a ∈ OPΓρ,P is P-elliptic of order −m. Proposition 2.8.8. Let a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γsρ,P be an arbitrary P-elliptic symbol of order s such that a(x, ξ) > 0, for any x, ξ ∈ Rd . Then for any 1 < p < ∞, p d d p d HPs,p = A−1 a (L (R )) = {u ∈ S (R ) : Aa u ∈ L (R )},

where Aa is the operator with Anti-Wick symbol a. Moreover a norm on HPs,p equivalent to (2.8.28) is given by Aa u Lp . Proof. Firstly suppose that Aa u ∈ Lp (Rd ) and write Λs u = Λs A−1 a (Aa u), with 0 Λs = ΛsP (x, D). Then Λs u ∈ Lp (Rd ) since Λs A−1 a ∈ OPM Γρ,P . Conversely let us take u ∈ S (Rd ) such that Λs u ∈ Lp (Rd ). By (2.8.27) we may write Aa u = Aa Λ−s (Λs u) − Aa Rs Λ−s (Λs u) + Aa Rs (Rs u). (2.8.29) So using Theorem 2.8.1, we conclude that Aa u ∈ Lp (Rd ) and there is a positive constant C independent of u such that

Aa u Lp ≤ C( Λs u Lp + Rs u Lp ),

(2.8.30)

2.8. Lp -Estimates

123

since Aa Λ−s ∈ OPM Γ0ρ,P and Aa Rs Λ−s , Aa Rs are regularizing. On the other hand, since Aa is an isomorphism of S (Rd ), Aa u Lp is a norm on HPs,p and it is easy to show that HPs,p is complete with respect to it; thus the equivalence with the norm (2.8.28) follows from the Open Mapping Theorem. Remark 2.8.9. We may as well reset Deﬁnition 2.8.5 by replacing ΛsP (x, D) with any elliptic pseudo-diﬀerential operator of order s. Namely, for any T with Pelliptic symbol in M Γsρ,P , HPs,p = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : T u ∈ Lp (Rd )}.

(2.8.31)

If moreover Q is a parametrix of T and QT = I + R, then T u Lp + Ru Lp is a norm in HPs,p equivalent to (2.8.28). Remark 2.8.10. Notice also that for any t < s and 1 < p < ∞ the following inclusions hold: S(Rd ) ⊂ HPs,p ⊂ HPt,p ⊂ S (Rd ), with compact embeddings. Using the above description of the spaces HPs,p we can plainly deduce the action of pseudo-diﬀerential operators in classes OPM Γm ρ,P . Namely the following holds. Proposition 2.8.11. If A ∈ OPM Γm ρ,P , then A : HPs+m,p → HPs,p , continuously, for all s ∈ R and 1 < p < ∞. Proof. In the following we set Gt for the operator with Anti-Wick symbol ΛP (x, ξ)t ∈ M Γt1 ,P ; since ΛP (x, ξ)t is positive and P-elliptic of order t, in view of Proposition μ

p d 2.8.8 we have HPt,p = G−1 t (L (R )) for any 1 < p < ∞. −1 Since Q := Gs AGs+m ∈ OPM Γ0ρ,P and, for any u ∈ HPs+m,p , Gs+m u ∈ Lp (Rd ), then Gs Au = Q(Gs+m u) ∈ Lp (Rd ); moreover there is a positive constant C such that

Gs Au Lp = Q(Gs+m u) Lp ≤ C Gs+m u Lp .

This shows the continuity of A and concludes the proof.

Using the results of the preceding section, we may now obtain precise results of Lp -regularity for the solutions of the P-elliptic equations. Theorem 2.8.12. Let a(x, ξ) ∈ M Γm ρ,P be P-elliptic, cf. Deﬁnition 2.7.15. Let A be the pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol a, in the standard left quantization. Let 1 < p < ∞ and s ∈ R. If u ∈ S (Rd ) and Au ∈ HPs,p , then u ∈ HPs+m,p . Moreover for any t < s + m there is a positive constant C, independent of u, for which (2.8.32)

u s+m,p,P ≤ C( Au s,p,P + u t,p,P ).

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

124

Proof. From Proposition 2.7.23 there exists an operator B ∈ OPM Γ−m ρ,P such that BA = I + R with R regularizing. For any u ∈ S (Rd ) we have then u = BAu − Ru. If Au ∈ HPs,p we get BAu ∈ HPs+m,p in view of Proposition 2.8.11, whereas Ru ∈ S(Rd ), hence u ∈ HPs+m,p . The estimate (2.8.32) follows, because of the continuous embedding S(Rd ) ⊂ HPt,p . From the theory of the Fredholm operators in the Banach spaces, cf. Remark 1.6.8, we have also readily the following theorem. To be precise, we shall denote here by As , s ∈ R, the restriction of A : S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) to HPs,p , or equivalently the extension of A : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ) to HPs,p . Theorem 2.8.13. Consider A ∈ OPM Γm ρ,P with P-elliptic symbol. Then, for 1 < p < ∞, s ∈ R: (i) As ∈Fred (HPs,p , HPs−m,p ); (ii) ind As is independent of s ∈ R and 1 < p < ∞;

(iii) If T ∈ OPM Γm with m < m, then As + Ts ∈ Fred (HPs,p , HPs−m,p ) and ind (As + Ts ) = ind As . Similarly to Theorem 2.1.12, we have a more explicit deﬁnition of HPs,p when s ∈ N; let us ﬁx attention for simplicity on the case s = 1. Theorem 2.8.14. Writing HPp for the space HP1,p , 1 < p < ∞, we have: * + HPp = u ∈ S (Rd ) : xβ D α u ∈ Lp (Rd ), (β, α) ∈ V (P) with equivalent norm

xβ Dα u Lp ,

(2.8.33) (2.8.34)

(β,α)∈V (P)

where V (P) is the set of vertices of P. Proof. Let us assume that u belongs to HP1,p , 1 < p < ∞; since xβ Dxα ∈ OPM Γ11 ,P μ

as long as (β, α) ∈ V (P), we have that

xβ Dα u Lp ≤ Cα,β u 1,p,P

for a positive constant Cα,β independent of u ( · 1,p,P is the norm (2.8.28) in HP1,p ). Conversely, we argue similarly to the proof of Theorem 2.1.12. Namely, we consider the operator T = W−1 P where W−1 is any P-elliptic operator in OPM Γ−1 ρ,P , 0 < ρ ≤ μ1 (for instance the pseudo-diﬀerential operator with left symbol ΛP (x, ξ)−1 ) β α β α and P is the diﬀerential operator P = (β,α)∈V (P) x Dx (x Dx ). Since P ∈ 2 OPM Γ 1 ,P and is P-elliptic, for some regularizing R we have that μ

T u Lp + Ru Lp ≤ C

(β,α)∈V (P)

W−1 x D (x D u) Lp + Ru Lp β

α

β

α

2.8. Lp -Estimates

125 ≤C

x D u Lp + u Lp , β

α

(β,α)∈V (P)

as W−1 xβ Dxα are operators in OPM Γ0ρ,P whenever (β, α) ∈ V (P). This ends the proof.

Remark 2.8.15. The proof of Theorem 2.8.14 shows that we may take, as an equivalent norm in HPp ,

xβ D α u Lp ,

u HPp = (β,α)∈P

where the sum is now extended to all multi-indices (β, α) ∈ P. In conclusion, we want to apply the preceding results to the operator with polynomial coeﬃcients cαβ xβ Dα (2.8.35) P = (β,α)∈P

obtained by standard left quantization from a multi-quasi-elliptic polynomial, cf. Examples 2.7.9 and 2.7.16. Let us refer to the space HPp , 1 < p < ∞, deﬁned as in (2.8.33). We have that (2.8.36) P : HPp −→ Lp is Fredholm, and the following a priori estimates are valid for a suitable C > 0: (2.8.37)

xβ Dα u Lp ≤ C P u Lp + u Lp . (β,α)∈P

These Lp -estimates are in particular valid for the Γ-elliptic diﬀerential operators 2 of Section 2.2, so for example for the harmonic oscillator H = − + |x| in Rd we have d 2

xj u Lp + Dx2 j u Lp ≤ C Hu Lp + u Lp . (2.8.38) j=1

Another relevant example is given by the more general Schrödinger operator P = − + V (x),

(2.8.39)

where V (x) is a multi-quasi-elliptic polynomial V (x) = cβ xβ ,

(2.8.40)

β∈Q

with Q a complete polyhedron in Rd . The symbol of P in (2.8.39) is given by the polynomial in R2d , 2 |ξ| + cβ xβ . (2.8.41) β∈Q

Chapter 2. Γ-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators and H-Polynomials

126

The corresponding Newton polyhedron P is easily computed, and turns out to be complete in R2d . Assuming further V (x) > 0

(2.8.42)

we deduce multi-quasi-ellipticity of the polynomial (2.8.41) with respect to P. The preceding results then apply and give in particular the estimates d j=1

Dx2j u Lp +

xβ u Lp ≤ C (− + V (x))u Lp + u Lp .

(2.8.43)

β∈Q

Examples of potentials V (x) satisfying the preceding assumptions are quasi-elliptic polynomials d 2N xj j , (2.8.44) V (x) = j=1

for positive integers Nj , and polynomials in R2 of the form V (x1 , x2 ) = xh1 1 + xh1 2 xk22 + xk21 ,

(2.8.45)

where the integers hj , kj , j = 1, 2, are even and satisfy the conditions in Example 2.6.10.

Notes d The classes Γm (Rd ) and Γm ρ (R ), in Section 2.1, were studied by Shubin, see [183] and the references there to previous works. We also cite Helﬀer [109]. Such classes play an important role in semi-classical analysis, besides [183] see Robert [170] and references therein. Passing to consider the Γ-elliptic diﬀerential operators in Sections 2.2 and 2.3, we observe that they appeared earlier in Grushin [104], [105] as a tool for study of the local properties of partial diﬀerential equations with multiple characteristics. In this regard we mention also Helﬀer and Rodino [110], [111], Parenti and Rodino [158] and Mascarello and Rodino [142] for applications to the local regularity problem and to Parenti and Parmeggiani [157] and Mughetti and Nicola [149] for applications to lower bound estimates. In particular, the proofs of Theorems 2.3.3 and 2.3.5 were ﬁrst given in [111], whereas we cite [142, Chapter 7] for details on the results of asymptotic integration used in Section 2.3; see also Gramchev and Popivanov [96]. The H-type and ρ-H-type polynomials of Section 2.4 were introduced by Hörmander [113], [114] in the context of the local regularity; see also Treves [189], Rodino [172]. We cite De Donno [70] for an alternative proof of Proposition 2.4.4. A main reference for Section 2.6, concerning multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials and generalizing Section 2.5, on the quasi-elliptic case, is the monograph of Boggiatto, Buzano and Rodino [19]; relevant previous works on the subject are Cattabriga

Notes

127

[46], Friberg [83], Gindikin and Volevich [91], Zanghirati [200]. For recent contributions on multi-quasi-elliptic polynomials see Gindikin and Volevich [92], Calvo [35], Bouzar and Chaili [25]. The source for Example 2.6.15 is Pini [163]; more general examples of H-polynomials, which are not multi-quasi-elliptic, can be found in De Donno and Oliaro [71]. The ΓP -pseudo-diﬀerential operators were ﬁrst introduced in Boggiatto [17], and then studied in detail in [19]. The presentation in Sections 2.7, 2.8 follows Morando [148]; in the local context, the same Lp -estimates were proved by Garello and Morando [85], inspired by the original idea of Cattabriga [47]. Concerning the theorem of Lizorkin and Marcinkiewicz, we refer for the proof to Lizorkin [134] and Stein [184]. In our proof of the Lp -boundedness in Section 2.8, we also used some arguments from Wong [197]. For boundedness on Lp and on other function spaces arising in Fourier Analysis we also refer to Stein [185], the recent contribution by Cordero and Nicola [54] and the references therein. Finally, we would like to cite Garetto [86], where the Γ-pseudo-diﬀerential calculus is recast in the context of Colombeau generalized functions, based on the space S(Rd ), see also Garetto, Gramchev and Oberguggenberger [87], Garetto and Hörmann [88], Hörmann, Oberguggenberger and Pilipovic [120].

Chapter 3

G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators Summary As in Chapter 2, the basic example here is a partial diﬀerential operator with polynomial coeﬃcients in Rd , that is P =

cαβ xβ Dα ,

wherein the sum (α, β) ∈ Nd × Nd runs over a ﬁnite subset of indices. The symbol in the standard quantization is p(x, ξ) =

cαβ xβ ξ α =

cγ z γ

with z = (x, ξ) ∈ R2d , γ = (β, α) ∈ N2d . As we have seen in Chapter 2, Hörmander’s condition, i.e., Γ-hypoellipticity |∂zγ p(z)| |p(z)|z−ρ|γ|

(3.0.1)

for z ∈ R2d , |z| ≥ R > 0, 0 < ρ ≤ 1, is suﬃcient to obtain the global regularity of P . However, the condition is not necessary. In fact, the aim of the present chapter is to discuss classes of symbols p which do not satisfy (3.0.1) and nevertheless give rise to globally regular operators P . As an elementary example in this connection, consider a polynomial q(ξ) depending only on the ξ-variables and satisfying for some integer m ≥ 1: ξm |q(ξ)| ξm

for ξ ∈ Rd .

(3.0.2)

It follows from (3.0.2) that q(ξ) is elliptic of order m with respect to the ξ-variables, but the estimates (3.0.1) are not satisﬁed in the whole space R2d . On the other

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

130

hand, the global regularity of the partial diﬀerential operator with constant coeﬃcients q(D) is easily proved directly. To be deﬁnite, ﬁx attention on the onedimensional case: q(ξ) =

m

cj ξ j ,

ξ ∈ R, cj ∈ C, cm = 0.

j=0

Then the lower bound (3.0.2) is satisﬁed if and only if the algebraic equation q(ξ) = 0 has no real roots, which amounts to requiring that all the solutions of the ordinary diﬀerential equation q(D)u =

m

cj D j u = 0

j=0

have exponential decay/growth; it follows easily that q(D)u ∈ S(R), u ∈ S (R) imply u ∈ S(R), i.e., q(D) is globally regular. The lower bound in (3.0.2), corresponding to the absence of real roots, is essential to get the conclusion; for example, if q(ξ) = ξ and q(D) = D in R, then the equation Du = 0 admits u(x) = const. as solution, with u ∈ S (R), u ∈ S(R). A relevant example of operator q(D) in Rd , d > 1, with symbol satisfying (3.0.2), is the free particle Schrödinger operator −Δ − λ, λ ∈ R+ ∪ {0}. In Section 3.1 we re-consider the previous examples in the framework of the socalled G-calculus. Namely, we deﬁne the class Gm,n (Rd ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R, of all the symbols a(x, ξ) satisfying for α ∈ Nd , β ∈ Nd , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| ξm−|α| xn−|β| , x ∈ Rd , ξ ∈ Rd .

(3.0.3)

The deﬁnition of G-ellipticity, generalizing (3.0.2), is given by xn ξm |a(x, ξ)| for |x|2 + |ξ|2 ≥ R2 > 0.

(3.0.4)

We refer to Section 3.1 for the corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential calculus. With the notations in Chapter 1, we have Φ(x, ξ) = x, Ψ(x, ξ) = ξ, that gives a couple of sub-linear temperate weights, cf. (1.1.1) and (1.1.2). d m,n (Rd ), In Section 3.2 we study classical G-symbols a ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ) ⊂ G m possessing three principal parts: σψ (a), homogeneous with respect to ξ; σen (a), m,n homogeneous with respect to x; σψ,e (a), homogeneous with respect to x and ξ separately. The deﬁnition of G-ellipticity can be reset in terms of principal parts. As an example, consider p(x, ξ) = cαβ xβ ξ α , (3.0.5) |α|≤m, |β|≤n

Summary

131

d which we may regard as an element of Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ), and assume m,n σψ,e (p) =

cαβ xβ ξ α = 0

for x = 0, ξ = 0,

(3.0.6)

cαβ xβ ξ α = 0

for all x ∈ Rd and ξ = 0,

(3.0.7)

cαβ xβ ξ α = 0 for x = 0 and all ξ ∈ Rd .

(3.0.8)

|α|=m |β|=n

σψm (p) =

|α|=m |β|≤n

σen (p) =

|α|≤m |β|=n

Namely, (3.0.6), (3.0.7), (3.0.8) hold simultaneously if and only if the G-ellipticity condition (3.0.4) is satisﬁed. When n = 0, i.e., the case of an operator with constant coeﬃcients, we recapture (3.0.2). Besides construction of parametrix and global regularity, the previous assumptions of G-ellipticity provide Fredholm m,n (Rd ), deﬁned for nonproperty and a priori estimates in the Sobolev spaces HG negative integers m, n by

u HGm,n =

xβ D α u L2 < ∞. (3.0.9) |α|≤m |β|≤n

Section 3.3 is devoted to a detailed analysis of G-elliptic ordinary diﬀerential operators. Similarly to Section 2.3, we apply here the theory of Asymptotic Integration, and we deduce some exponential decay properties of the solutions, which will be extended later in the book to semi-linear equations, cf. Sections 6.3, 6.4, 6.5. Section 3.4 concerns other applications of the general calculus of Chapter 1 to the problem of global regularity. Namely we take here, for some ρ with 0 < ρ < 1, the couple of weights Φ(x, ξ) = 1, Ψ(x, ξ) = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )ρ/2

(3.0.10)

Φ(x, ξ) = (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )ρ/2 , Ψ(x, ξ) = 1.

(3.0.11)

or alternatively

In the framework of the corresponding calculus, we prove global regularity of the operator P = −Δ + V (x), (3.0.12) where the potential V (x) is a polynomial satisfying x2ρ V (x),

|∂ α V (x)| V (x).

(3.0.13)

As an example, consider in R2 , V (x1 , x2 ) = (1 + x21 )(1 + x22 ).

(3.0.14)

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

132

Similarly, we have a global regularity for the operator P = V (D) + |x|2 ,

(3.0.15)

where the polynomial V (ξ) satisﬁes, in the variable ξ, the same estimates (3.0.13). Notice that the assumption (3.0.13) for V is weaker than Hörmander’s property in Rd , cf. Example (3.0.14). Hence the operator P is not locally regular in the Schwartz’ sense, in general.

3.1 G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus Other basic examples of the general classes of symbols considered in Chapter 1 are the G-classes deﬁned below. With respect to the Γ-classes studied in Chapter 2, now the asymptotic behaviour in the (x, ξ)-space of the two weights Φ, Ψ is not optimal separately, nevertheless the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10) is satisﬁed thanks to a favourable combination of decay properties. Deﬁnition 3.1.1. We deﬁne Gm,n (Rd ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R, as the set of all functions a(x, ξ) ∈ C ∞ (R2d ) satisfying, for all α, β ∈ Nd , the estimates |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| ξm−|α| xn−|β| ,

(x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

(3.1.1)

The weights Φ(x, ξ) = x, Ψ(x, ξ) = ξ are sub-linear (1.1.1) and temperate (1.1.2), and the strong uncertainty principle (1.1.10) is obviously satisﬁed, since xξ (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 . Hence all the results of Chapter 1 apply for the corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential operators u(ξ) dξ, ¯ (3.1.2) Au(x) = a(x, D)u(x) = eixξ a(x, ξ) with action a(x, D) : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ), S (Rd ) → S (Rd ). Namely, we shall denote by OPGm,n (Rd ) the class of the operators in (3.1.2) with symbol a ∈ Gm,n (Rd ). The deﬁnition of OPGm,n (Rd ) does not depend on the quantization. In the standard quantization, if a ∈ Gm,n (Rd ), b ∈ Gm ,n (Rd ), then the operator c(x, D) = a(x, D)b(x, D) belongs to OPGm+m ,n+n (Rd ), with symbol c(x, ξ) ∼ (α!)−1 ∂ξα a(x, ξ)Dxα b(x, ξ), (3.1.3) α

where it is worth observing that the orders of the term ∂ξα a(x, ξ)Dxα b(x, ξ) are given by m + m − |α|, n + n − |α|. Similarly we may argue for transposed operators and formal adjoints. The corresponding deﬁnition of ellipticity is the following. Deﬁnition 3.1.2. Let a ∈ Gm,n (Rd ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R. We say that a is G-elliptic if there exists R > 0 such that xm ξn |a(x, ξ)| for |x|2 + |ξ|2 ≥ R2 .

(3.1.4)

3.1. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

133

We then repeat from Chapter 1 the results on the existence of parametrices, cf. Theorem 1.3.6, Corollary 1.3.9, particularized to G-elliptic symbols. Theorem 3.1.3. Let a ∈ Gm,n (Rd ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R, be G-elliptic. Then there exists b ∈ G−m,−n (Rd ) such that b(x, D) is a parametrix of a(x, D), i.e., a(x, D)b(x, D) = I + S1 ,

b(x, D)a(x, D) = I + S2

where S1 and S2 are regularizing operators. Hence a(x, D) is globally regular, cf. Deﬁnition 1.3.8. Passing to consider the corresponding Sobolev spaces, we may deﬁne them by means of the pseudo-diﬀerential operators as,t (x, D) = xt Ds , s ∈ R, t ∈ R, that is the standard quantization of the symbol as,t (x, ξ) = xt ξs ∈ Gs,t (Rd ). Note that as,t (x, ξ) is G-elliptic, and as,t (x, D) : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ) is an isomorphism, extending to an isomorphism on S (Rd ), with inverse b−s,−t (x, D) = D−s x−t ; the asymptotic expansion of b−s,−t (x, ξ) ∈ G−s,−t (Rd ) can be computed in terms of (3.1.3). Deﬁnition 3.1.4. For s ∈ R, t ∈ R we deﬁne the Hilbert space s,t HG (Rd ) = D−s x−t L2 (Rd ) = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : xt Ds u ∈ L2 (Rd )} (3.1.5) with the scalar product (u, v)H s,t = xt Ds u, xt Ds v L2 G

(3.1.6)

and corresponding norm

u H s,t = xt Ds u L2 . G

(3.1.7)

According to Proposition 1.5.3, for every T ∈ OPGm,n (Rd ) with G-elliptic symbol we have s,t HG (Rd ) = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : T u ∈ L2 (Rd )} (3.1.8) with scalar product equivalent to (3.1.6) (u, v)T = (T u, T v)L2 + (Ru, Rv)L2

(3.1.9)

where R is a regularizing operator associated to a parametrix of T . From Proposition 1.5.5, we then obtain the following boundedness result. Theorem 3.1.5. Every A ∈ OPGm,n (Rd ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R, deﬁnes for all s ∈ R, t ∈ R a continuous operator s,t s−m,t−n (Rd ) → HG (Rd ). A : HG

(3.1.10)

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

134

s,t s ,t We have compact immersion HG (Rd ) → HG (Rd ) for s > s , t > t , and s,t s ,t compactness of the map A : HG (Rd ) → HG (Rd ) for A ∈ OPGm,n (Rd ) whenever s − s > m, t − t > n. Moreover s,t s,t HG (Rd ) = S(Rd ), HG (Rd ) = S (Rd ). (3.1.11) s∈R, t∈R

s∈R, t∈R

For a couple m, n of non-negative integers, an equivalent deﬁnition of the space s,t (Rd ) is given by HG m,n HG (Rd ) = {u ∈ S (Rd ) : xβ Dα u ∈ L2 (Rd ) for |α| ≤ m, |β| ≤ n},

with equivalent norm

u HGm,n =

xβ Dα u L2 .

(3.1.12)

(3.1.13)

|α|≤m |β|≤n

s,0 (Rd ) gives the standard Sobolev space Observe also that for t = 0 the space HG s d H (R ). We may now improve Theorem 3.1.3 adding precise Sobolev estimates.

Theorem 3.1.6. Consider A ∈ OPGm,n (Rd ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R, with G-elliptic symbol s,t s+m,t+n and assume u ∈ S (Rd ), Au ∈ HG (Rd ), s ∈ R, t ∈ R. Then u ∈ HG (Rd ) and for every s < s + m, t < t + n, (3.1.14)

u H s+m,t+n ≤ C Au H s,t + u H s ,t , G

G

G

for a positive constant C depending on s and t. Moreover, the operator A, cons+m,t+n s,t sidered as a map HG (Rd ) → HG (Rd ) is Fredholm, cf. Theorem 1.6.9. If m, n is a couple of positive integers, we may refer to the equivalent norm (3.1.13) and re-write (3.1.14) for s = s = 0, t = t = 0 as

xβ D α u L2 ≤ C ( Au L2 + u L2 ) . (3.1.15) |α|≤m |β|≤n

We may as well consider G-hypoelliptic symbols and related operators. Theorem 3.1.7. Assume a ∈ Gm,n (Rd ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R, 0 < ρ ≤ 1, i.e., for all ρ 2d (α, β) ∈ N , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| ξm−ρ|α| xn−ρ|β| , (x, ξ) ∈ R2d .

(3.1.16)

Assume that a is hypoelliptic, i.e., there exist m , n with m ≤ m, n ≤ n and R > 0 such that

ξm xn |a(x, ξ)|

for |x|2 + |ξ|2 ≥ R2

(3.1.17)

3.1. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Calculus

135

and for every (α, β) ∈ N2d , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| |a(x, ξ)|ξ−ρ|α| x−ρ|β| .

(3.1.18)

Then, denoted by A = a(x, D) the pseudo-diﬀerential operator with symbol a, there exists B = b(x, D) with symbol b ∈ G−m ,−n (Rd ) such that AB = I + S1 ,

BA = I + S2 ,

with S1 and S2 regularizing operators. The estimate (3.1.14) remains valid with m, n replaced by m , n . Let us now compare G-classes with Γ-classes. We may say that G-classes are more general, in the sense that ΓM (Rd ), M ∈ R, is included in Gm,n (Rd ) for a suitable couple m, n, take for example m = n = M , if M > 0, and m = n = 0 for M < 0, and use the obvious estimates x ≤ (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 , ξ ≤ (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 , (1 + |x|2 + |ξ|2 )1/2 ≤ xξ. Also, the generalized classes m m Γm ρ , Γρ,P , M Γρ,P in Chapter 2 are included in the classes deﬁned by (3.1.16) and Γ-hypoellipticity implies G-hypoellipticity, cf. (3.1.18). Summing up, all the results of global regularity in Chapter 2 are recaptured by the above Theorem 3.1.7. However, Γ-elliptic symbols and P-elliptic symbols are not G-elliptic, and we cannot identify in the G-frame the peculiar properties of the corresponding operators, in particular the sharp Sobolev estimates in Sections 2.1, 2.7 and 2.8. In the opposite direction, the G-symbols do not satisfy in general the estimates required for Γ-symbols. Relevant examples are given by Fourier multipliers, i.e., operators with symbols depending only on the ξ-variables. Namely, consider a(ξ) ∈ C ∞ (Rd ) satisfying for all α ∈ Nd and some m ∈ R, |∂ α a(ξ)| ξm−|α| , ξ ∈ Rd .

(3.1.19)

We have a ∈ Gm,0 (Rd ) and a is G-elliptic when ξm |a(ξ)|,

ξ ∈ Rd .

(3.1.20)

It is worth emphasizing that estimate (3.1.20) is assumed to be valid in the whole Rd , which implies a(ξ) = 0 for all ξ ∈ Rd . In fact, the vanishing of a(ξ) at a point ξ0 would contradict (3.1.4) for any choice of the constant R > 0. Note also that a symbol a(ξ) satisfying (3.1.19) does not belong to any of the Γ-classes, but when a(ξ) is a polynomial, and in this case Γ-ellipticity fails anyhow for m ≥ 1. If (3.1.20) is satisﬁed, we may apply Theorems 3.1.3 and 3.1.6. The parame1 trix of a(D) is actually an inverse, with symbol b(ξ) = a(ξ) ∈ G−m,0 (Rd ). Then a(D) : S(Rd ) → S(Rd ) is an isomorphism extending to an isomorphism a(D) : S (Rd ) → S (Rd ) and s,t s−m,t (Rd ) → HG (Rd ) a(D) : HG

(3.1.21)

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

136 where s ∈ R, t ∈ R, with inverse

s−m,t s,t b(D) : HG (Rd ) → HG (Rd ).

(3.1.22)

Let us discuss in detail some examples of Fourier multipliers, considering ﬁrst diﬀerential operators with constant coeﬃcients. Example 3.1.8. Partial diﬀerential operators. For m a positive integer, consider p(ξ) = cα ξ α , cα ∈ C, (3.1.23) |α|≤m

giving the operator P = p(D) =

cα Dα .

(3.1.24)

|α|≤m

Deﬁne pm (ξ) =

cα ξ α .

(3.1.25)

|α|=m

Then the G-ellipticity (3.1.20) is equivalent to assume simultaneously: (i) pm (ξ) = 0 for ξ = 0; (ii) p(ξ) = 0 for all ξ ∈ Rd . In fact, from the proof of Proposition 2.1.5 we know that (i) is equivalent to the ellipticity of p(ξ) as a polynomial in ξ-variables: |ξ|m |p(ξ)| for |ξ| ≥ R,

(3.1.26)

with R > 0 suﬃciently large. On the other hand (3.1.26) and (ii), jointly, are equivalent to (3.1.27) ξm |p(ξ)|, ξ ∈ Rd . Under the G-ellipticity assumption (3.1.27), the previous conclusions hold, in particular P in (3.1.24) is globally regular. Note that if p(ξ0 ) = 0 for some ξ0 ∈ Rd , then global regularity fails, because u(x) = eiξ0 x satisﬁes u ∈ S (Rd ), u ∈ S(Rd ) and P (eiξ0 x ) = p(ξ0 )eiξ0 x = 0. Example 3.1.9. Ordinary diﬀerential operators. In the one-dimensional case, consider the symbol m−1 p(ξ) = ξ m + cj ξ j , cj ∈ C, ξ ∈ R, j=0

with corresponding ordinary diﬀerential operator P = p(D) = Dxm +

m−1 j=0

cj Dxj .

3.2. Polyhomogeneous G-Operators

137

The G-ellipticity reduces to assume p(ξ) = 0 for all ξ ∈ R, that is all roots rj ∈ C, j = 1, ..., m of the algebraic equation p(ξ) = 0 satisfy Im rj = 0. Consequently a basis for the classical solutions of P u = 0 is given by functions of the form u(x) = Q(x)eirj x for some polynomial Q(x), with Re irj = 0, giving exponential growth in R+ or in R− . Hence the only solution u ∈ S(R) of P u = 0 is the trivial solution, as expected from the previous arguments. We get also that P u = f ∈ S(R) admits a unique s+m,t s,t (R) → HG (R) is an isomorphism solution u ∈ S(R). More precisely, P : HG for all s ∈ R, t ∈ R. Example 3.1.10. The free particle. As a particular case of the above examples, consider in Rd the operator of the free particle P = −Δ − λ with symbol

p(ξ) = |ξ|2 − λ.

The symbol is G-elliptic and the operator globally regular, if and only if λ ∈ R+ ∪ {0}. Example 3.1.11. The intermediate-long-wave operator. The following non-polynomial symbol appears in the study of solitary waves, see later in this book, Section 6.4: p(ξ) = ξCtgh ξ + γ, ξ ∈ R, with Ctgh ξ = Ch ξ/Sh ξ = (eξ + e−ξ )/(eξ − e−ξ ) and γ ∈ R. We have p ∈ G1,0 (R) and the G-ellipticity condition is satisﬁed if γ > −1.

3.2 Polyhomogeneous G-Operators It is natural to introduce the subclass of Gm,n (Rd ) of the polyhomogeneous (or classical) symbols. The deﬁnition is somewhat more complicated than in the Γcase, since homogeneity has to be considered separately in the x and ξ variables. Building blocks of the calculus are the following diﬀerent types of homogeneous symbols. Type 1 symbols: orders m, n; bi-homogeneity with respect to x, ξ. We assume that a(x, ξ) ∈ C ∞ ((Rd \ {0}) × (Rd \ {0})) is positively homogeneous of degree m ∈ R, n ∈ R with respect to x and ξ separately, i.e., a(sx, tξ) = tm sn a(x, ξ) for all t > 0, s > 0. m,n the class of such functions. We shall also denote by Hξ,x

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

138

If we take χ ∈ C ∞ (Rd ), χ(x) = 1 for |x| ≥ 2, χ(x) = 0 for |x| ≤ 1, then χ(x)χ(ξ)a(x, ξ) ∈ Gm,n (Rd ). Type 2 symbols: (i) orders m, n; homogeneity m with respect to ξ. We assume that a(x, ξ) ∈ C ∞ (Rd × (Rd \ {0})) is positively homogeneous of degree m with respect to ξ, i.e., a(x, tξ) = tm a(x, ξ), for all s > 0. We assume moreover for all α, β ∈ Nd , |∂ξα ∂xβ a(x, ξ)| xn−|β|

for x ∈ Rd , ξ ∈ Sd−1 ,

where Sd−1 = {ξ ∈ Rd : |ξ| = 1}. Taking χ as before, we have χ(ξ)a(x, ξ) ∈ Gm,n (Rd ). (ii) orders m, n; homogeneity n with respect to x. Same deﬁnition as in (i), interchanging the role of x and ξ. Type 3 symbols: (i) orders m, n; homogeneity m with respect to ξ, polyhomogeneity with respect to x. Let a(x, ξ) satisfy the same conditions as in Type 2, (i), and assume m,n−j , cf. Type 1, j = 0, 1, ..., such that the existence of bn−j (x, ξ) ∈ Hξ,x ∞ a(x, ξ) ∼ j=0 bn−j (x, ξ), in the sense that, for all α, β ∈ Nd , α β χ(x)bn−j (x, ξ) xn−N −|β| , x ∈ Rd , ξ ∈ Sd−1 . ∂ξ ∂x a(x, ξ) − 0≤j
As before we have χ(ξ)a(x, ξ) ∈ Gm,n (Rd ). (ii) orders m, n; homogeneity n with respect to x, polyhomogeneity with respect to ξ. Same deﬁnition as in (i), interchanging the role of x and ξ. We may now deﬁne the classes of the G-polyhomogeneous symbols. Again, we distinguish three types: symbols which are classical with respect to ξ, with respect to x, with respect to ξ, x simultaneously. d m,n Deﬁnition 3.2.1. We deﬁne Gm,n (Rd ) admitting cl(ξ) (R ) as the class of all a ∈ G asymptotic expansion ∞ am−k (x, ξ) (3.2.1) a(x, ξ) ∼ k=0

where am−k are Type 2, (i), namely of orders m − k, n and homogeneity m − k with respect to ξ, for k = 0, 1, . . . . The asymptotic expansion (3.2.1) is in the G-sense, i.e., for χ as before: a(x, ξ) − χ(ξ)am−k (x, ξ) ∈ Gm−N,n (Rd ). 0≤k
3.2. Polyhomogeneous G-Operators

139

d We deﬁne consequently by standard quantization OPGm,n cl(ξ) (R ). We shall also write (3.2.2) σψm−k (a) = am−k d and we call it the interior symbol of order m − k of a ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ) (R ).

Example 3.2.2. Consider the partial diﬀerential operator P = cα (x)D α , |α|≤m

with symbol

p(x, ξ) =

cα (x)ξ α ,

|α|≤m

where we assume |∂xβ cα (x)| xn−|β|

for x ∈ Rd .

d We have then p(x, ξ) ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ) (R ), with

σψm−k (p) =

cα (x)ξ α , k = 0, 1, . . . , m.

|α|=m−k d m,n Deﬁnition 3.2.3. We deﬁne Gm,n (Rd ) with asympcl(x) (R ) as the class of all a ∈ G totic expansion ∞ a(x, ξ) ∼ bn−j (x, ξ) (3.2.3) j=0

where bn−j are Type 2, (ii), namely of orders m, n − j and homogeneity n − j with respect to x, for j = 0, 1, . . . . d The classes OPGm,n cl(x) (R ) are deﬁned consequently. We shall write σen−j (a) = bn−j d and call it the exit symbol of order n − j of a ∈ Gm,n cl(x) (R ).

Example 3.2.4. Consider the symbol p(x, ξ) =

cβ (ξ)xβ ,

|β|≤n

where |∂ξα cβ (ξ)| ξm−|α| for ξ ∈ Rd . d Then p(x, ξ) ∈ Gm,n cl(x) (R ) with

σen−j (p) =

|β|=n−j

cβ (ξ)xβ , j = 0, 1, . . . , n.

(3.2.4)

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

140

The corresponding pseudo-diﬀerential operator, in the standard quantization, is given by xβ cβ (D), P = |β|≤n

where the Fourier multipliers cβ (D) can be regarded as elements of Gm,0 (Rd ), cf. (3.1.19). m,n d d We ﬁnally consider the subclass of Gm,n cl(ξ) (R ) ∩ Gcl(x) (R ), obtained by requiring further that am−k in (3.2.1) and bn−j in (3.2.3) are Type 3 symbols. d m,n Deﬁnition 3.2.5. We deﬁne Gm,n (Rd ) such that: cl(ξ,x) (R ) as the class of all a ∈ G

(I) We have

∞

a(x, ξ) ∼

am−k (x, ξ),

k=0

where am−k , k = 0, 1, . . . , are Type 3, (i) symbols, with orders m − k, n, and homogeneity m − k with respect to ξ, polyhomogeneity with respect to x. (II) We have a(x, ξ) ∼

∞

bn−j (x, ξ),

j=0

where bn−j , j = 0, 1, . . . , are Type 3, (ii) symbols, with orders m, n − j, and homogeneity n − j with respect to x, polyhomogeneity with respect to ξ. Interior symbols σψm−k (a)(x, ξ), k = 0, 1, . . . , and exit symbols σen−j (a)(x, ξ), j = 0, 1, . . . , are deﬁned as before, cf. (3.2.2) and (3.2.4). Since now they are Type 3 symbols, we may actually proceed further. Namely, for σψm−k (a)(x, ξ) we know m−k,n−j , that we may denote by σen−j (σψm−k (a)), the existence of elements of Hξ,x j = 0, 1, . . . , such that σψm−k (a) ∼

∞

σen−j (σψm−k (a)),

(3.2.5)

j=0

cf. the deﬁnition of Type 3, (i) symbols. Similarly we may introduce functions m−k,n−j such that σψm−k (σen−j (a)) ∈ Hξ,x σψn−j (a) ∼

∞

σψm−k (σen−j (a)).

(3.2.6)

k=0

The information given by (I) and (II) in Deﬁnition 3.2.5 is overabundant, in the sense that the two procedures give actually the same result: m−k,n−j σψ,e (a) = σen−j (σψm−k (a)) = σψm−k (σen−j (a)), j, k = 0, 1, . . . .

(3.2.7)

3.2. Polyhomogeneous G-Operators

141

d m Deﬁnition 3.2.6. Let a ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ). We call σψ (a) the interior principal part of n a, and σe (a) the exit principal part. They are Type 3 symbols, with homogeneity m in ξ and, respectively, homogeneity n in x. Fixing k = j = 0 in (3.2.7), we m,n m,n (a) ∈ Hξ,x , which we call the bi-homogeneous principal part of a. obtain σψ,e d The class of pseudo-diﬀerential operators OPGm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ) is deﬁned consequently.

Example 3.2.7. Let P =

cαβ xβ Dα .

(3.2.8)

|α|≤m |β|≤n

d We have P ∈ OPGm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ) and the principal parts of the symbol p(x, ξ) in the standard quantization are given by: σψm (p)(x, ξ) = cαβ xβ ξ α , (3.2.9) |α|=m |β|≤n

σen (p)(x, ξ) =

cαβ xβ ξ α ,

(3.2.10)

cαβ xβ ξ α .

(3.2.11)

|α|≤m |β|=n

m,n (p)(x, ξ) = σψ,e

|α|=m |β|=n

Example 3.2.8. Consider P = xn Dm , m ∈ R, n ∈ R, with symbol p(x, ξ) = xn ξm . We have P ∈ |x|n |ξ|m .

d OPGm,n cl(ξ,x) (R )

and σψm (p) = xn |ξ|m , σen (p) =

(3.2.12) m,n |x|n ξm , σψ,e (p)

=

d Our attention in the sequel will be restricted to the classes OPGm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ). The results in Chapter 1 and Section 3.1 obviously apply. In particular, the deﬁnition of the class, as well as the notions of the principal parts σψm (a), σen (a), m,n σψ,e (a), do not depend on the quantization.

m ,n d d If a(x, ξ) ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ) and b ∈ Gcl(ξ,x) (R ), then c(x, D) = a(x, D)b(x, D) ∈

,n+n OPGm+m (Rd ), with asymptotic expansions for the symbol c(x, ξ) as stancl(ξ,x) dard; in particular

σψm+m (c) = σψm (a)σψm (b),

(3.2.13)

σen+n (c) = σen (a)σen (b),

(3.2.14)

m+m ,n+n (c) σψ,e

(3.2.15)

=

m,n m ,n σψ,e (a)σψ,e (b).

We may treat a similarly transposed and formal adjoint of a(x, D) ∈ d OPGm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ). The main novelty with respect to Section 3.1, and motivation

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

142

for the present study of the polyhomogeneous symbols, is given by the following equivalent deﬁnition of G-ellipticity. d Theorem 3.2.9. Let a ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R. The symbol a is G-elliptic, cf. Deﬁnition 3.1.2, if and only if

σψm (a)(x, ξ) = 0 for all x ∈ Rd , ξ = 0,

(3.2.16)

σen (a)(x, ξ) = 0 m,n σψ,e (a)(x, ξ) =

for all x = 0, ξ ∈ R ,

(3.2.17)

0 for all x = 0, ξ = 0.

(3.2.18)

d

In order to prove Theorem 3.2.9 it will be convenient to deﬁne for any given d a ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ) the associated symbol m,n (a)(x, ξ), a ˜(x, ξ) = χ(ξ)σψm (a)(x, ξ) + χ(x)σen (a)(x, ξ) − χ(x)χ(ξ)σψ,e

(3.2.19)

where χ is deﬁned as before: χ ∈ C ∞ (Rd ), χ(x) = 1 for |x| ≥ 2, χ(x) = 0 for d |x| ≤ 1. We have a ˜ ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ), with the same principal parts as a: m,n m,n a) = σψm (a), σen (˜ a) = σen (a), σψ,e (˜ a) = σψ,e (a). σψm (˜

(3.2.20)

It follows easily from Deﬁnition 3.2.5 that a(x, ξ) − a ˜(x, ξ) ∈ Gm−1,n−1 (Rd ). cl(ξ,x)

(3.2.21)

We may also re-write (3.2.19) in the form: m,n (a)(x, ξ) + rψ (x, ξ) + re (x, ξ), a ˜(x, ξ) = χ(x)χ(ξ)σψ,e

(3.2.22)

m,n d rψ (x, ξ) = χ(x)σen (a)(x, ξ) − χ(x)χ(ξ)σψ,e (a)(x, ξ) ∈ Gm−1,n cl(ξ,x) (R ),

(3.2.23)

m,n d (a)(x, ξ) ∈ Gm,n−1 re (x, ξ) = χ(ξ)σψm (a)(x, ξ) − χ(x)χ(ξ)σψ,e cl(ξ,x) (R ).

(3.2.24)

where

Proof of Theorem 3.2.9. Multiplying by the symbol x−n ξ−m , cf. Example 3.2.8, we are reduced to proving the theorem in the case m = 0, n = 0. Deﬁne then a ˜ according to (3.2.19), (3.2.22), 0,0 (a)(x, ξ) a ˜(x, ξ) = χ(ξ)σψ0 (a)(x, ξ) + χ(x)σe0 (a)(x, ξ) − χ(x)χ(ξ)σψ,e

(3.2.25)

0,−1 d d ˜ ∈ and set consequently rψ (x, ξ) ∈ G−1,0 cl(ξ,x) (R ), re ∈ Gcl(ξ,x) (R ). Since a − a

d −1,−1 (Rd ) in view of (3.2.21), the G-ellipticity of a, cf. Deﬁnition G−1,−1 cl(ξ,x) (R ) ⊂ G 3.1.2, is equivalent to the G-ellipticity of a ˜, i.e.,

|˜ a(x, ξ)| ≥ const. > 0, |x|2 + |ξ|2 ≥ R2

(3.2.26)

3.2. Polyhomogeneous G-Operators

143

for a suitable positive constant R. We are therefore reduced to prove that (3.2.26) is equivalent to (3.2.16), (3.2.17), (3.2.18), that read now σψ0 (˜ a)(x, ξ) = 0 for all x ∈ Rd , ξ = 0,

(3.2.27)

a)(x, ξ) = 0 σe0 (˜ 0,0 σψ,e (˜ a)(x, ξ) =

for all x = 0, ξ ∈ R ,

(3.2.28)

0 for all x = 0, ξ = 0.

(3.2.29)

d

Let us ﬁrst assume that (3.2.26) is valid, and deduce (3.2.27), (3.2.28), (3.2.29). 0,0 0,0 (˜ a) ∈ Hξ,x , we have from (3.2.22), (3.2.23), (3.2.24), for Considering ﬁrst σψ,e x = 0, ξ = 0: 0,0 0,0 σψ,e (˜ a)(x, ξ) = lim χ(λx)χ(λξ)σψ,e (˜ a)(λx, λξ) λ→+∞ , ˜(λx, λξ) − rψ (λx, λξ) − re (λx, λξ) = lim a λ→+∞

= lim a ˜(λx, λξ) = 0 λ→+∞

in view of (3.2.26). This proves (3.2.29). On the other hand, for ξ = 0 we have a)(x, ξ) = lim χ(λξ)σψ0 (˜ a)(x, λξ) σψ0 (˜ λ→+∞ , ˜(x, λξ) − rψ (x, λξ) = lim a = lim a ˜(x, λξ) = 0. λ→+∞

λ→+∞

This gives (3.2.27). Similarly we prove (3.2.28). In the opposite direction, assume (3.2.27), (3.2.28), (3.2.29). Because of the bi-homogeneity, we have from (3.2.29) 0,0 |σψ,e (˜ a)(x, ξ)| ≥ C > 0

for x = 0, ξ = 0.

Applying then (3.2.22), (3.2.23), (3.2.24), we obtain similar estimates for a ˜: |˜ a(x, ξ)| ≥ C > 0,

for |x| ≥ T, |ξ| ≥ T,

with suitable new constants C and T > 0. To handle a ˜(x, ξ) in the strip |x| ≤ T , we write a)(x, ξ) + rψ (x, ξ). a ˜(x, ξ) = χ(ξ)σψ0 (˜ From (3.2.27), in view of the homogeneity with respect to ξ we have a)(x, ξ)| ≥ > 0, |χ(ξ)σψ0 (˜

for |ξ| ≥ 2, |x| ≤ T,

d for a suitable depending on T . Since rψ ∈ G−1,0 cl(ξ,x) (R ), the same estimates are valid for a ˜(x, ξ), if we shrink > 0 and impose |ξ| ≥ R for a suﬃciently large R. The same argument applies in the strip |ξ| ≤ T , by writing

a ˜(x, ξ) = χ(x)σe0 (˜ a)(x, ξ) + re (x, ξ) and using the assumption (3.2.28). This gives (3.2.26) and concludes the proof of Theorem 3.2.9.

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

144

d Theorem 3.2.10. Let a ∈ Gm,n cl(ξ,x) (R ), m ∈ R, n ∈ R, satisfy (3.2.16), (3.2.17),

d (3.2.18). Then there exists b ∈ G−m,−n cl(ξ,x) (R ) such that b(x, D) is a parametrix of a(x, D). Hence A = a(x, D) is globally regular, satisﬁes the estimates (3.1.14) and s+m,t+n s,t is Fredholm, considered as a map HG (Rd ) → HG (Rd ).

Proof. In view of Theorem 3.2.9, the symbol a is G-elliptic, and we may apply Theorem 3.1.3 and Theorem 3.1.6. It remains to prove that the symbol b(x, ξ) of the parametrix is polyhomogeneous. To this aim, set m −1 , x ∈ Rd , ξ = 0, b−m ψ (x, ξ) = σψ (a)(x, ξ) n b−n e (x, ξ) = (σe (a)(x, ξ))

−1

,

x = 0, ξ ∈ Rd ,

which are symbols of Type 3, in view of (3.2.16) and (3.2.17), and −1 m,n (x, ξ) = σ (a)(x, ξ) , x = 0, ξ = 0, b−m,−n ψ,e ψ,e −m,−n d in view of (3.2.18). We then construct ˜b ∈ G−m,−n well deﬁned in Hξ,x cl(ξ,x) (R ) as ˜b(x, ξ) = χ(ξ)b−m (x, ξ) + χ(x)b−n (x, ξ) − χ(x)χ(ξ)b−m,−n (x, ξ). e ψ,e ψ

In view of (3.2.13), (3.2.14), (3.2.15), we obtain ˜b(x, D)a(x, D) = I + S1 ,

a(x, D)˜b(x, D) = I + S2 ,

−m,−n d d where S1 , S2 ∈ OPG−1,−1 cl(ξ,x) (R ). The expression of the symbol b(x, ξ) ∈ Gcl(ξ,x) (R ) of the parametrix follows then from iterative arguments, as in the proof of Theorem 1.3.6.

Example 3.2.11. Reconsidering Example 3.2.7, we have from Theorem 3.2.9 that the symbol cαβ xβ ξ α p(x, ξ) = |α|≤m |β|≤n

of the operator P in (3.2.8) is G-elliptic if cαβ xβ ξ α = 0 for x ∈ Rd , ξ = 0,

(3.2.30)

|α|=m |β|≤n

that is, we have local ellipticity in the classical sense, and additionally cαβ xβ ξ α = 0 for x = 0, ξ ∈ Rd ,

(3.2.31)

|α|≤m |β|=n

cαβ xβ ξ α = 0 for x = 0, ξ = 0.

|α|=m |β|=n

In the case n = 0 we recapture the conclusions in Example 3.1.8.

(3.2.32)

3.3. G-Elliptic Ordinary Diﬀerential Operators

145

Note that (3.2.32) is necessary to get G-ellipticity, and to conclude global regularity through Theorem 3.2.10. Consider in fact the operator in OPG1,1 cl(ξ,x) (R) P = Dx − x,

x ∈ R,

with symbol ξ−x. Conditions (3.2.30) and (3.2.31) are obviously satisﬁed, however 1,1 = 0, hence we do not have G-ellipticity. A solution u ∈ S (R) of P u = 0 is σψ,e x2

given by u(x) = ei 2 ∈ S(R), and global regularity fails. We refer to Section 3.3 for a detailed discussion of G-ellipticity for ordinary diﬀerential operators.

3.3 G-Elliptic Ordinary Diﬀerential Operators Let us ﬁrst ﬁx attention on ordinary diﬀerential operators with polynomial coefﬁcients. We may re-write in this case the operator P ∈ OPGm,n cl(ξ,x) (R), m ∈ N, n ∈ N, in the form m P = Qj (x)Dxj , x ∈ R, (3.3.1) j=0

where Qj , j = 0, . . . , m, are polynomials of degree ≤ n: Qj (x) =

n

cjk xk ,

cjk ∈ C, x ∈ R.

(3.3.2)

k=0

We may read the G-ellipticity of the symbol of P in terms of (3.2.30), (3.2.31), (3.2.32) in Example 3.2.11. Namely, (3.2.30) corresponds to assuming that Qm (x) = 0 for all x ∈ R.

(3.3.3)

Note that this implies analyticity in R of all the classical solutions of P u = 0. As for condition (3.2.31), this is equivalent to assuming that m

cjn ξ j = 0

for all ξ ∈ R,

(3.3.4)

j=0

granting exponential asymptotic behaviour of the classical solutions, see below. Finally, (3.2.32) amounts to assuming that cmn = 0.

(3.3.5)

Theorem 3.3.1. Under the conditions (3.3.3), (3.3.4), (3.3.5), we may regard the operator in (3.3.1), (3.3.2) as a Fredholm map m,n (R) → L2 (R), P : HG

with ind P = 0.

(3.3.6)

146

Chapter 3. G-Pseudo-Diﬀerential Operators

Proof. The Fredholm property of P follows from Theorem 3.2.10. It remains to prove the assertion on the index. Assume then cmn = 1, without loss of generality, and consider the operator P0 = Qm (x)P00 with P00 = Dxm +

m−1

cjn Dxj .

j=0

The symbols of P and P0 have the same principal parts, hence we have P − P0 ∈ OPGm−1,n−1 (R). Therefore, P −P0 is a compact operator, so that ind P = ind P0 , cl(ξ,x) cf. Theorems 3.1.5 and 1.6.6. On the other hand P00 belongs to OPGm,0 cl(ξ,x) (R) with G-elliptic symbol, in view of (3.3.4). As observed in Example 3.1.9, P00 : m,n 0,n (R) → HG (R) is then an isomorphism. The same conclusion is valid for the HG multiplication operator 0,n Qm : H G (R) → L2 (R), because of (3.3.3), and in view of Corollary 1.6.5 we conclude ind P = ind Qm P00 = ind Qm + ind P00 = 0. We may go further in the analysis of the solutions of the equation P u = 0 by applying the theory of asymptotic integration. Let us ﬁrst observe that the solutions u(x) extend to the complex domain, with possibly a ﬁnite number of singularities at the points x ∈ C where Qm (x) = 0. Consider then the roots r1 , . . . , rm of the equation m cjn ξ j = 0. (3.3.7) j=0

In view of (3.3.4), we have Im rj = 0 for all j = 1, . . . , m. Assume for simplicity that all the rj , j = 1, . . . , m, are distinct. We recall the following basic result on the asymptotic expansions of the solutions of P u = 0 in sectors of the complex plane, see for example Wasow [194]. Proposition 3.3.2. Given any sector Λ = {x ∈ C \ {0} : ϕ1 < arg x < ϕ2 } with ϕ2 − ϕ1 < π, there exist uΛ,j (x), j = 1, . . . , m, linearly independent solutions of P u = 0, such that for x ∈ Λ, x → ∞, uΛ,j (x) ∼ xsj exp[irj x]

∞

β−p,j x−p .

(3.3.8)

p=0

We can determine sj , β−p,j , j = 1, . . . , m, p = 0, 1, . . ., by letting the righthand side of (3.3.8) be a formal solution of P u = 0, cf. Section 2.3. The asymptotic meaning of (3.3.8) is then the same as in Proposition 2.3.1. Here we understand x ∈ C, |x| > R, with R suﬃciently large, so that Qm (x) = 0 and the solutions uΛ,j are holomorphic in Λ ∩ {|x| ≥ R}.

3.3. G-Elliptic Ordinary Diﬀerential Operators

147

Taking now two sectors Λ+ , Λ− containing R+ , R− respectively, we may − conclude the existence of u+ j , uj , j = 1, . . . , m, satisfying (3.3.8) in R+ , R− respectively. Every classical solution u(x) can be written as u=

m

+ μ+ j uj =

j=1

m

− μ− j uj ,

− μ+ j , μj ∈ C.

j=1

Assume Im rj > 0 for j = 1, . . . , m+ ,

Im rj < 0 for j = m+ + 1, . . . , m,

m+ + m− = m. (3.3.9) = 0 for m+ < Then u belongs to S(R), or equivalently to S (R), if and only if μ+ j + j ≤ m and μ− j = 0 for 1 ≤ j ≤ m , that is + − u= μ+ μ− j uj = j uj . 1≤j≤m+

m+ <j≤m

Summing up, we have obtained the following result. Theorem 3.3.3. Let u ∈ S (R) be a solution of P u = 0, with P as in (3.3.1), (3.3.2) satisfying (3.3.3), (3.3.4), (3.3.5). Then u ∈ S(R) and |u(x)| e−δ|x| ,

x ∈ R,

(3.3.10)

for some constant δ > 0. Moreover u(x) has holomorphic extension for x ∈ C in the strip {|Im x| < T } for some T > 0. Letting m+ , m− be deﬁned as in (3.3.9), we have (3.3.11) dim (Ker P ∩ S(R)) ≤ min{m+ , m− }. In particular, if m+ = 0 or m− =